User'S Manual: Compact Simplified Inverters

Cat. No.
I558-E1-02
USERS MANUAL
SYSDRIVE JX
SERIES
Compact Simplified Inverters
Introduction
Introduction
Thank you for choosing the general-purpose Inverter 3G3JX. This User's Manual (hereinafter called "this manual") describes the parameter setting methods required for installation/wiring and operation of the 3G3JX model, as well as troubleshooting and inspection methods. z This manual should be delivered to the actual end user of the product. z After reading this manual, keep it handy for future reference. z This manual describes the specifications and functions of the product as well as the relations between them. You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible with the product. z Intended readers This manual is intended for: Those with knowledge of electrical systems (qualified electrical engineers or the equivalent), and also in charge of: Introducing the control equipment Designing the control system Installing and/or connecting the control equipment Field management
Read and Understand This Manual

Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability

WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY. In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted. IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products. At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products: Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this manual. Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations. Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products. NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any consequence thereof.
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
Indications and Meanings of Safety Information
In this user's manual, the following precautions and signal words are used to provide information to ensure the safe use of the 3G3JX Inverter. The information provided here is vital to safety. Strictly observe the precautions provided.
Meanings of Signal Words
WARNING CAUTION
Alert Symbols in This Document
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, is likely to result in serious injury or may result in death. Additionally there may be severe property damage.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage.
WARNING
Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock. Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock. Be sure to ground the unit. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or fire. (200-V class: type-D grounding, 400-V class: type-C grounding) Do not remove the front cover during the power supply and 5 minutes after the power shutoff. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock. Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock. The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated. Do not change wiring, mode change switches (S7, S8), optional devices or replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
Do not connect resistors to the terminals (+1, P/+2, N/-) directly. Doing so might result in a small-scale fire, heat generation or damage to the unit. Install a stop motion device to ensure safety. Not doing so might result in a minor injury. (A holding brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety.) Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor/regenerative braking unit. In case of a braking resistor, install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor. Not doing so might result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor/regenerative braking unit. Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor/regenerative braking unit. The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which, if short-circuited, might cause damage to itself or other property. Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring. Do not touch the Inverter fins, braking resistors and the motor, which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff. Doing so may result in a burn. Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) that matches the Inverter capacity on the power supply side. Not doing so might result in damage to property due to the short circuit of the load. Do not dismantle, repair or modify the product. Doing so may result in an injury.
Precautions for Safe Use
Precautions for Safe Use

Installation and Storage
Do not store or use the product in the following places. Locations subject to direct sunlight. Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications. Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications. Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations. Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases. Locations subject to exposure to combustibles. Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salt. Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals. Locations subject to shock or vibration.
Transporting, Installation, and Wiring

Do not drop or apply a strong impact on the product. Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction. Do not hold by the front cover, but hold by the fins during transportation. Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input/output terminals. Doing so may result in damage to the product. Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely. Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body. Do not connect any load other than a three-phase inductive motor to the U, V, and W output terminals. Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations. Not doing so may result in damage to the product. Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise. Locations subject to strong magnetic fields. Locations close to power lines.
Operation and Adjustment

Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be changed easily from low to high. Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Maintenance and Inspection

Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance, inspection or parts replacement.
Precautions for Correct Use

Installation
Mount the product vertically on a wall or on a DIN track (optional) with the product's longer sides upright. The material of the wall has to be nonflammable such as a metal plate.
Main Circuit Power Supply

Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as AC power supply voltage.
Error Retry Function

Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is turned off before resetting the alarm because the machine may abruptly start.
Non-Stop Function at Momentary Power Interruption

Do not come close to the machine when selecting restart in the non-stop function at momentary power interruption selection (b050) because the machine may abruptly start after the power is turned on.
Operation Stop Command

Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed. When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals, the motor may start abruptly. Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal.
Product Disposal
Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product.
Warning Labels
Warning labels are located on the Inverter as shown in the following illustration. Be sure to follow the instructions.
Warning Description
Checking Before Unpacking
Checking Before Unpacking

Checking the Product
On delivery, be sure to check that the delivered product is the Inverter 3G3JX model that you ordered. Should you find any problems with the product, immediately contact your nearest local sales representative or OMRON sales office.
zChecking the Nameplate
Inverter model Input specifications Output specifications
zChecking the Model
3 G 3 J X -A 2 0 0 2
Maximum applicable motor capacity 002 004 007 015 022 037 055 075 0.2 kW 0.4 kW 0.75 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.7 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
Voltage class 2 E 4 3-phase 200 V AC (200-V class) 1/3-phase 200 V AC (200-V class) 3-phase 400 V AC (400-V class)
Enclosure rating A Panel-mounting (IP10 min.) or closed wall-mounting models
Checking the Accessories

Note that this manual is the only accessory included with the 3G3JX model. Mounting screws and other necessary parts must be provided by the user.
10
Revision History
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number located at the lower left of the front and back covers.
Cat. No. I558-E1-02

Revision code
Revision code 01
Revision date December 2007 First printing
Changes and revision pages
02
April 2008
New Inverters with different capacities added (3G3JXA2055/-A2075/-A4055/-A4075) New functions added for with 5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters Manual descriptions improved and/or corrected Page10, Page 1-1, Page 1-2, Page 2-2, Page 2-8, Page 213, Page 2-14, Page 2-15, Page 2-16, Pages 4-77 to 4104, Page 7-1, Page 7-2, Page 7-6, Page 7-18, Page 7-20, Page 7-26, Page 7-27, Page 7-30
11
About This Manual
About This Manual

This User's Manual is compiled chapter by chapter for user's convenience as follows. Understanding the following configuration ensures more effective use of the product.
Overview Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 2 Design Describes features and names of parts. Provides external dimensions, installation dimensions, peripheral device design/selection instructions, and other information necessary for design. Describes names of parts, the Inverter's operations, including how to use the keys on the Digital Operator, and the monitor function. Describes the functions of the Inverter. Describes the causes and their countermeasures if the Inverter fails, including the solutions to possible troubles (troubleshooting). Describes items for periodic inspection and/or maintenance for the Inverter. Provides Inverter specifications, as well as the specifications and dimensions of peripheral devices. Describes the summarized parameter settings as a reference for users who have used this Inverter and understood the functions.
Chapter 3 Operation Chapter 4 Functions Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Maintenance Operations Inspection and Maintenance
Chapter 7 Specifications Appendix
12
Contents
Introduction..............................................................................................1 Read and Understand This Manual.........................................................2 Safety Precautions ..................................................................................5 Precautions for Safe Use.........................................................................7 Precautions for Correct Use ....................................................................8 Checking Before Unpacking ....................................................................10 Revision History.......................................................................................11 About This Manual...................................................................................12 Chapter 1
1-1 1-2
Overview
Functions .................................................................................................1-1 Appearance and Names of Parts.............................................................1-3
Chapter 2
2-1 2-2
Design
Installation................................................................................................2-1 Wiring.......................................................................................................2-6
Chapter 3
3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7
Operation
Test Run Procedure.................................................................................3-3 Test Run Operation .................................................................................3-4 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator..............................3-9 Operation Procedure (Example: Factory Default)....................................3-11 Keys.........................................................................................................3-17 Parameter Transition ...............................................................................3-18 Parameter List .........................................................................................3-20
Chapter 4
4-1 4-2
Functions
Monitor Mode...........................................................................................4-1 Function Mode .........................................................................................4-5
Chapter 5
5-1 5-2
Maintenance Operations
Special Display List..................................................................................5-1 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................5-5
Chapter 6
6-1 6-2
Inspection and Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance....................................................................6-1 Storage ....................................................................................................6-7
Chapter 7
7-1 7-2
Specifications
Standard Specification List ......................................................................7-1 Measurement Method of Output Voltage.................................................7-5
13
Contents
7-3 7-4 7-5 Connection Example ............................................................................... 7-6 Dimensional Drawing .............................................................................. 7-8 Options.................................................................................................... 7-14
Appendix
Appendix-1 Parameter List ................................................................................ App-1 Appendix-2 Product Life Curve .......................................................................... App-17
Index
14
Chapter 1 Overview
1-1 Functions .......................................................... 1-1 1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts .................... 1-3
1-1 Functions
1Overview
1-1 Functions
3G3JX Inverter Models
Rated voltage Enclosure rating Max. applicable motor capacity 0.2 kW 0.4 kW 0.75 kW 1.5 kW 3-phase 200 V AC 2.2 kW 3.7 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 0.4 kW IP20 (Complies with JEM1030) 3-phase 400 V AC 0.75 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.7 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 0.2 kW 0.4 kW 1/3-phase 200 V AC 0.75 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3G3JX-A2022 3G3JX-A2037 3G3JX-A2055 3G3JX-A2075 3G3JX-A4004 3G3JX-A4007 3G3JX-A4015 3G3JX-A4022 3G3JX-A4037 3G3JX-A4055 3G3JX-A4075 3G3JX-AE002 3G3JX-AE004 3G3JX-AE007 3G3JX-AE015 3G3JX-AE022 Model 3G3JX-A2002 3G3JX-A2004 3G3JX-A2007 3G3JX-A2015
Overview
International Standards Models (EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards)

The 3G3JX Inverter meets the EC Directives and UL/cUL standard requirements for worldwide use.
Classification EMC Directive EC Directives Low-voltage Directive UL/cUL Standards
Applicable standard EN61800-3: 2004 EN61800-5-1: 2003 UL508C
1-1
1-1 Functions
Compact Simplified Inverter for Customer's Environment and Application Demands

Simple Wiring and Easy Installation
The main circuit adopts upper/lower wiring as with a conductor. In addition, the side-by-side mounting of the Inverters and the built-in zero-phase reactor contribute to space saving in control panel.
Overview
Wide Ranging Capacity and Power Supply

In spite of its compact size, the 3G3JX Inverter provides a wide ranging capacity from 0.2 to 7.5 kW. Moreover, the three-phase 200 V, three-phase 400 V, and single/three-phase 200 V common types are made to meet the power supply specifications for use outside Japan.
PID Function
The PID function is featured for the easier control of the fan and pump. It helps to control airflow and pressure.
Emergency Shutoff Function

Switching the dedicated switch (S8) changes from the multi-function input (input 3) to the emergency shutoff input. You can directly turn off a motor control power module without operating the software.
Compliance With All Standards

The 3G3JX Series has achieved compliance with CE and UL/cUL.
The RoHS Directive

The standard model meets the requirements of the RoHS Directive.
Noise and Harmonics Suppression Option

The three-phase models incorporate a zero-phase reactor (radio noise filter) as a standard specification. For the single/three-phase common type, optional suppression is available. When the optional DC reactor is added, the 3G3JX Series will also meet the requirements specified by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of Japan.
Handles a Variety of I/O Signals

The 3G3JX Series can handle a variety of I/O signals for wide-ranging applications. Analog voltage input: 0 to 10 V Analog current input: 4 to 20 mA
1-2
1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts

Top cover Fin Digital Operator
Overview
Front cover
Main housing
FREQ (FREQUENCY) adjuster Bottom cover
The size of the fin varies with the motor capacity. There are two sizes depending on the motor capacity, but the fundamental structure is the same. Remove the front cover when connecting the power supply, the motor, and the control signal.
Connection to RJ45 Jack

Connect the communications cable after opening the cover of the communications connector. Remove the front cover to switch communications. Refer to "Removing the Front Cover" (page 26) for instructions on how to remove the front cover.
8k8k8k8
Communications connector (with cover)
*The cover of the communications connector is removable. Remove the front cover to attach it.
1-3
Names of Parts Inside the Front Cover

Main circuit terminal block (input side)
8k8k8k8
Do not touch these! (ELECTRICAL HAZARD: For factory maintenance only)
Overview
Communications connector
Relay output terminal block

S7 485 OPE S8 ON OFF
Control circuit terminal block
Main circuit terminal block (output side)
S7: OPE/485 communications selector (Default = OPE side) S8: Emergency shutoff function selector (Default = OFF) (Caution) Do not switch the emergency shutoff function selector (S8) without reason as the allocation of the multi-function input terminals may change. For details, refer to "Emergency Shutoff Input Function" (page 4-45).
1-4
Overview
1-5
Chapter 2 Design
2-1 Installation ........................................................ 2-1 2-2 Wiring ................................................................ 2-6
2-1 Installation
2Design
2-1 Installation
2
WARNING
Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock. Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Design
Be sure to ground the unit. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or fire. (200-V class: type-D grounding, 400-V class: type-C grounding)
CAUTION
Do not connect resistors to the terminals (+1, P/+2, N/-) directly. Doing so might result in a small-scale fire, heat generation or damage to the unit. Install a stop motion device to ensure safety. Not doing so might result in a minor injury. (A holding brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety.) Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor/regenerative braking unit. In case of a braking resistor, install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor. Not doing so might result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor/regenerative braking unit. Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor/regenerative braking unit. The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which, if short-circuited, might cause damage to itself or other property. Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring.
Safety Information
Installation and Storage
Do not store or use the product in the following places. Locations subject to direct sunlight. Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications. Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications. Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations. Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases. Locations subject to exposure to combustibles. Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts. Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals. Locations subject to shock or vibration.
2-1
2-1 Installation Transporting, Installation, and Wiring

Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product. Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction. Do not hold by the front cover, but hold by the fins during transportation. Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input/output terminals. Doing so may result in damage to the product. Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely. Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body. Do not connect any load other than a three-phase inductive motor to the U, V, and W output terminals. Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations. Not doing so may result in damage to the product. Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise. Locations subject to strong magnetic fields. Locations close to power lines.
Design
Precautions for Use

Installation
Install the Inverter vertically on the wall or DIN tracks (optional). Install the Inverter on a nonflammable wall surface material, like metal.
Position for installing a screw Model 3G3JX-A2002 A2004 A2007 AE002 AE004
Model 3G3JX-A2015 A2022 A2037 A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4037 AE007 AE015 AE022
Positions for installing screws
Screw size for installation: M5 Position for installing a screw
Screw size for installation: M5 Positions for installing screws
Position for installing a screw Model 3G3JX-A2055 -A2075 -A4055 -A4075
Screw size for installation: M6 Position for installing a screw
2-2
2-1 Installation Main Circuit Power Supply

Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter matches the AC power supply voltage.
Installation Environment
Increased ambient temperatures will shorten the life of the Inverter. Keep the Inverter away from heating elements (such as a braking resistor, DC reactor, etc.). If the Inverter is installed in a control panel, keep the ambient temperature within the range of the specifications, taking dimensions and ventilation into consideration.
Design
10 cm min.
Airflow
Wall 5 cm min. 5 cm min.
10 cm min.
You can install multiple 3G3JX Inverters side by side in the control panel (side-by-side installation). Again, keep the ambient temperature within the specified range (40C or below).
If the ambient temperature is from 40C through to 50C, the carrier frequency should be reduced and the Inverter capacity should be increased.
2-3
2-1 Installation
To raise the carrier frequency, reduce the output current (or derate the rated current) as shown in the graph below.
(1) Side-By-Side installation (ambient temperature:40C)

200-V Class 100% Output current (Rated current %) Output current (Rated current %) 95% 90% 3.7 kW 85% 80% 75% 70% 2 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency [kHz] 0.2 to 2.2 5.5/7.5kW 100% 95% 90% 85% 80% 3.7kW 75% 70% 2 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency [kHz] 400-V Class 0.4 to 2.2kW 5.5/kW
Design
7.5kW
(2) Ambient temperature 50C

200-V Class 100% Output current (Rated current %) 7.5kW 95% 90% 0.75kW 85% 80% 3.7kW 75% 70% 65% 60% 2 4 6 8 10 Carrier frequency [kHz] 12 0.2/0.4/2.2/5.5kW Output current (Rated current %) 1.5kW 100% 95% 90% 85% 80% 75% 70% 65% 60% 2 4 6 8 10 Carrier frequency [kHz] 12 3.7kW 2.2kW 0.4 to 1.5/7.5kW 400-V Class 5.5kW

200-V Class 100% Output current (Rated current %) Output current (Rated current %) 0.2 to 2.2 5.5/7.5kW 100% 400-V Class 0.4 to 2.2 5.5/7.5kW
95% 3.7kW 90%
95%
90% 3.7kW 85%
85%
80%
80%
75% 2 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency [kHz]
2-4
2-1 Installation
Before installing the Inverter, place a cover over all the ventilation openings to shield them from foreign objects. After completing the installation process, be sure to remove the covers from the Inverter before operation.
2
Ventilation openings (Both sides and top)
Design
2-5
2-2 Wiring
2-2 Wiring
Removing and Mounting the Front Cover
Removing the Front Cover
Loosen the mounting screw at the lower left of the front cover. Lift the bottom of the front cover to remove while holding the body. 1. Loosen the front cover mounting screw.
Design
2. Lift the bottom of the front cover to remove.
2-6
2-2 Wiring Mounting the Front Cover

Hang the upper side of the front cover on the hooks, and push down both sides of the cover simultaneously until it clicks into place. 1. Hang the upper side on the hooks. (Two hooks)
Design
2. Push down the cover until it clicks into place. (Both sides)
2-7
2-2 Wiring
Standard Connection Diagram

DC reactor (optional) +1 P/+2 R/L1 (L1) *1 S/L2 (L2) T/L3 (N/L3) 3-phase 200 V AC 1/3-phase 200 V AC *2 3-phase 400 V AC Multi-function input 1 Multi-function input 2 Multi-function input 3 Multi-function input 4 Multi-function input 5 Sequence input common Frequency reference power supply Frequency reference (1 to 2 k) Frequency reference input (voltage) Frequency reference common Frequency reference input (current) P24 PSC S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 SC FS FV FC FI P1 PC Multi-function output Multi-function output common MB MA MC Relay output *3 Common N/U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 M Regenerative braking unit
Design
AM
Analog monitor output
*1. The items in parentheses indicate terminal symbols for 3G3JX-AE . *2. Connect a single-phase 200-V AC input to terminals L1 and N/L3. *3. By factory default, MA is set to NC contact, and MB to NO contact in the relay output (MA, MB) contact selection (C036).
2-8
2-2 Wiring
Wiring to the Power Supply and Motor

(Example) 3G3JX-A2004 Main circuit terminal block (input side) (Example) 3G3JX-A2037 Main circuit terminal block (input side)
Design
Main circuit terminal block (output side) Main circuit terminal block (output side) Power supply Ground Power supply Ground
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+2 +1 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 N/- P/+2 +1
Motor earth
Motor earth
Motor
Motor
Do not connect the power supply other than to R/L1, S/L2, or T/L3. Do not remove the short-circuit bar between P/+2 and +1, except when a DC reactor is connected. Note 1: Install an earth leakage breaker on the power supply input side. (Select an earth leakage breaker having a larger high-frequency sensed current and avoid unnecessary operation.) If the wiring between the Inverter and the motor is too long (longer than 10 m), the thermal relay may malfunction due to harmonics. Install an AC reactor on the Inverter output side, or use a current sensor instead of the thermal relay.
2-9
2-2 Wiring
Note 2: Connect securely to the ground as specified (type-D grounding for 200-V class, and type-C grounding for 400-V class). Do not share the grounding electrode with other strong electrical devices.
Example of incorrect grounding
Example of correct grounding
Inverter Inverter Inverter
Inverter Inverter
Design
Ground bolt
Inverter
Wiring the Control Circuit Terminals and Relay Terminals
Relay output MB MA MC Analog Frequency monitor reference output input
Multi-function input
Multi-function output
AM FS FV FI FC S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 SC PSC P24 PC P 1
Short-circuit bar
2-10
2-2 Wiring
Wiring Example of the Control Circuit Terminal Block (Sink Logic)

At sink logic (NPN) : External power supply input At source logic (PNP) : Power supply output Note: By factory default, the input logic of the multi-function input terminal circuit is set to the sink logic. Reverse rotation RUN command Forward rotation RUN command
AM
External power supply terminal for input signal

PSC
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 1
Design
Input common
Reset input
FS
FV
FI
FC
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
SC
P24
PC
P1
Variable resistor frequency reference (1 to 2 k) Frequency meter
Short-circuit bar (at sink logic [when internal power supply is used])
RY
Frequency arrival signal (27 V DC 50 mA max.)
Note 1: When connecting a relay to the multi-function output terminal, install a surge-absorbing diode in parallel with the relay. The output circuit can break down due to surge voltage when the relay is switched on/off. Note 2: Remove the short-circuit bar when the external power supply is used. Note 3: For the signal line, use a twisted shield wire and apply the shield coating as illustrated below. Keep the length to 20 m or less.
Perform insulating treatment.
Ground connection is not required. Connect to the ground terminal of the Inverter.
Note 4: Keep the wiring away from the power cable of the main circuit and from the wiring on the relay control circuit. (More than 10 cm apart)
2-11
2-2 Wiring
Selecting the Sequence Input Method (Sink/Source Logic)

Logic Selection Method for the Multi-function Input Terminals
When the internal power supply is used, you can switch the logic by rearranging the short-circuit bar on the control circuit terminal block. The default setting is sink logic.
<Sink Logic> S1 SC PSC P24 PC <Source Logic> S1 SC PSC P24 PC
Design
Short-circuit bar
Short-circuit bar
Note 1: Remove the short-circuit bar when the external power supply is used.
Inside the Inverter When interface power supply is used
When external power supply is used
+V Short-circuit bar
P24 PSC SC S1 24 V DC
+V
P24 PSC SC S1 S5 24 V DC
Sink logic
S5 COM Output unit etc. Inverter
COM Output unit etc.
DC24V Inverter
COM
P24 Short-circuit PSC bar SC S1 24 V DC
COM 24 V DC
P24 PSC SC
24 V DC
Source logic
S1
S5 0V Output unit etc. Inverter 0V Output unit etc.
S5
Inverter
2-12
2-2 Wiring
Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals

Connecting the Main Circuit Terminals
Wiring Motor output (kW) Applicable Inverter model Power cable 3G3JX-A2002 3G3JX-A2004 0.4 3G3JX-A4004 3G3JX-A2007 0.75 3G3JX-A4007 3G3JX-A2015 1.5 3G3JX-A4015 3G3JX-A2022 2.2 3G3JX-A4022 3G3JX-A2037 3.7 3G3JX-A4037 3G3JX-A2055 5.5 3G3JX-A4055 3G3JX-A2075 7.5 3G3JX-A4075 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3G3JX-AE002 3G3JX-AE004 3G3JX-AE007 3G3JX-AE015 3G3JX-AE022 2.0 5.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 mm2 1.25 mm2 1.25 mm2
Applicable device Earth leakage breaker (ELB) 5A 5A 3A 10 A 5A 15 A 10 A 20 A 10 A 30 A 15 A 50 A 30 A 60 A 30 A 5A 5A 10 A 15 A 20A 15 A 6A 15 A 10 A 20 A 10 A 30 A 15 A 40 A 20 A 50 A 25 A 14 A Fuse size (class J) Rated 600 V 10 A 10 A
Design
0.2
1.25 mm2 2.0 mm2 mm2 mm2
2.0 mm2 3.5 mm2 2.0 mm

2
mm2
3.5 mm2 8.0 mm2 3.5 mm

2
mm2
2.0 mm2 2.0 mm2 5.5 mm2

2
5.5 mm
For the main circuit terminals, always use insulated electrical wires with a rated voltage of 600 V and a rated temperature of 80C or higher. Use the crimp-type terminal with an insulating sleeve to connect to the terminals. Up to two wires can be connected to one terminal. To prevent possible voltage drops, increase the wire size in accordance with the cable length. To connect the 100-V or 200-V model to the relay output terminal block, use a wire of 0.75 mm2. To connect seven wires or more to the control circuit terminal block, use a shield line of 0.5 mm2 or less. Strip the signal line by 5 to 6 mm, and connect the exposed wire. (In the case of stranded wires, make sure that the wires are not unraveled.) Make sure that the maximum outside coating diameter of the signal line is 2.0 mm or less (except for the alarm signal line). (For the mark tube mounted cable and multi-core cable, keep both the mark tube and the sheathstripped length 40 mm or more from the connecting end. A thick line may prevent proper closing of the cover of the terminal block.) To meet UL standards, always insert a UL-standard fuse (J type) on the power supply side. Use a ground wire with a larger diameter than that of the power cable shown above.
2-13
2-2 Wiring
Choose the sensitivity current of the earth leakage breaker (ELB), depending on the total distance (L) between the Inverter and the power supply, and the Inverter and the motor.
L 100 m max. 300 m max. 800 m max. Sensitivity current (mA) 30 100 200
Guide of leakage current: If a CV wire is used and routed through a metal pipe, the leakage current is 30 mA/km. Due to the higher specific inductive capacity of the H-IV wire, the leakage current increases about eight times. Use a wire with a sensitivity current one-level higher. The leakage current mentioned here is the effective value of the fundamental wave, and high-frequency currents are excluded.
Design
Terminal Arrangement
Main circuit terminal block Model (3G3JX-) Screw size W (mm)
Upper side of the body

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
7.1
Lower side of the body

N/P/+2 +1
A2002 to A2007 AE002 to AE004 (*1)
M3.5
7.1
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Main Circuit Terminal Block

9.2 or 13
A2015 to A2037 A4004 to A4037 AE007 to AE022 (*1) M4 9.2
Upper side of the body

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Lower side of the body

U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 N/P/+2 +1
A2055 to A2075 A4055 to A4075
M5
13
Main Circuit Terminal Block
*1. For 3G3JX-AE, R/L1 corresponds to L1, S/L2 to L2, and T/L3 to N/L3. Connect a single-phase 200-V AC input to terminals L1 and N/L3.
Relay Output Terminal Block MB MA MC
AM FS FV FI
Control Circuit Terminal Block

FC S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 SC PSC P24 PC P1
2-14
2-2 Wiring
Model (3G3JX-)
A2002 to A2007 AE002 to AE004 Screw size W (mm) 7.1
A2015 to A2037 A4004 to A4037 AE007 to AE022 Screw size M4 M2 M2.5 M4 W (mm) 9.2
A2055 to A2075 A4055 to A4075 Screw size M5 M2 M2.5 M5 W (mm) 13 13
Main circuit Control circuit Relay
M3.5 M2 M2.5 M4
Design
Ground
Screw Tightening Torque

Screw M2 M2.5 M3.5 M4 M5 Tightening torque 0.2 Nm (max. 0.25 Nm) 0.5 Nm (max. 0.6Nm) 0.8 Nm (max. 0.9 Nm) 1.2 Nm (max. 1.3 Nm) 3.0 Nm (max. 3.3 Nm)
Explanation of the Main Circuit Terminal Connection

Terminal symbol R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 * Terminal name Main power supply input terminal Function Connection example
Connect the input power supply.
U/T1, Inverter output V/T2, W/T3 terminal
Connect to the motor.
Motor
Normally connected by the short-circuit bar. Remove the short-circuit bar between +1 and P/+2 when a DC reactor is connected.
+1, P/+2
External DC reactor terminal
ELB
P/+2, N/-
Regenerative Connect optional regenerative braking braking unit units. connection terminal (If a braking torque is required) Ground (Connect to ground to prevent electric shock and reduce noise.)
Power supply
Do not remove the short-circuit bar between +1 and P/+2 when a DC reactor is not connected.
Ground terminal
For 3G3JX-AE's terminal symbols, R/L1 corresponds to L1, S/L2 to L2, and T/L3 to N/L3. Connect a single-phase 200-V AC input to terminals L1 and N/L3.
2-15
2-2 Wiring Main Circuit Connection Diagram

Molded case circuit-breaker (MCCB) Regenerative braking unit MC
AC reactor noise filter Fuse
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 *

Inverter 3G3JX
P/+2
N/-
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 M
Power supply
Design
* For 3G3JX-AE's terminal symbols, R/L1 corresponds to L1, S/L2 to L2, and T/L3 to N/L3.
Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals (Input Side)

Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
Always connect the Inverter and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) to protect the Inverter from damage that may result from short-circuiting. Always connect the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and power supply via an MCCB, according to the Inverter capacity. Install one MCCB per Inverter. Choose an appropriate MCCB capacity according to the fuse size on page 2-13. When choosing MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter's overload protection (1 minute at 150% of the rated output current). By programming the sequence as illustrated below, you can turn off the power via the relay outputs (MA, MB, and MC) for the 3G3JX Series.
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)
MC X1 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 * Inverter 3G3JX
Power supply X1 X2 X2 OFF ON X1 DC (24 V) relay MA (30 V DC, 50 mA max.) MC
Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter

The Inverter's output uses high-speed switching, and so generates high-frequency current leakage. (Generally, if the power cable is 1 m, the leakage current is approx. 100 mA per Inverter, and approx. 5 mA is added per additional meter of the power cable.) At the power supply input part, install a special-purpose ground fault interrupter for Inverters that excludes high-frequency leakage current and detects only the leakage current within a frequency range that is hazardous to humans. (Choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity current of at least 10 mA per Inverter.) Alternatively, use a general ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity current of 200 mA or more per Inverter, and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
2-16
2-2 Wiring
Installing a Magnetic Contactor (MC)

If the power supply of the main circuit is shut off due to sequencing, a magnetic contactor (MC) can be used. (When forcibly stopping the load with an MC on the primary side of the main circuit, however, the regenerative braking does not work and the load coasts to a stop (free run).) Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor (MC) to start and stop a load may cause the Inverter to break down. To extend the life of the Inverter's internal electrolytic capacitor, limit the frequency to no more than once every 30 minutes.
Connection Sequence to the Terminal Block
Design
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal because the phase sequence of the input power supply is irrelevant to that of the terminal block (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3).
Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (660 kVA or more) or the phase advance capacitor is in use, a large peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the converter unit to break down. Install an optional AC reactor on the input side of the Inverter. An AC reactor will also improve the power factor of the power input side.
Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode when magnetic contactors (MC), electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoid, and magnetic brakes are used.
Connecting a Regenerative Braking Unit

When running a load with a large inertia or a vertical axis, regenerative energy will return to the Inverter. If overvoltage in the main circuit is generated during deceleration, this indicates that the regenerative energy exceeds the capacity of the Inverter. In this case, use a regenerative braking unit. Select a regenerative braking unit referring to the allowable operation cycle of the regenerative braking unit specifications regardless of the Inverter capacity. When using a braking resistor with the resistor of a regenerative braking unit removed, refer to the connectable resistance of the regenerative braking unit and the allowable braking frequency of the braking resistor in making a selection. Refer to 7-5 Options (page 7-14 to 16) for further information when making a selection.
2-17
2-2 Wiring
When using a regenerative braking unit, be sure to include a sequence whereby the power supply for the Inverter will be turned off in the event of abnormal overheating. Not doing so may result in fire. For a regenerative braking unit: Use the error contact output (MA, MB).
Molded-case circuit breaker MC (MCCB)
Magnetic contactor (MC) R/L1 (L1) * S/L2 (L2) T/L3 (N/L3) N/P/+2
2
Inverter 3G3JX
Design
Power supply XB OFF ON
+1
MC SA AL1 AL2 MC SA P RB R1 R2 Regenerative braking unit N P

DCL
MC
DC reactor
* The items in parentheses indicate terminal symbols for 3G3JX-AE. <Braking Resistors and Braking Resistor Units for the Inverter>
Name Model 3G3AX-RBU21 Regenerative braking unit 3G3AX-RBU22 3G3AX-RBU41 3/1-phase 200 V 3-phase 400 V Specifications For general use (with built-in resistor) For heavy instantaneous regenerative power (with built-in resistor) For general use (with built-in resistor)
Installing a Noise Filter on the Input Side

The Inverter's output uses high-speed switching, so noise may be transmitted from the Inverter to the power line, affecting peripheral devices. It is recommended that a noise filter be installed on the input side to minimize noise transmission. (Installing a noise filter on the input side can also reduce the noise from the power line to the Inverter.) <Recommended Input Noise Filters for the Inverter>
General 3G3AX-NFI EMC-conforming 3G3AX-EFI
2-18
2-2 Wiring
Power supply
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) Input noise filter for Inverter * Inverter 3G3JX
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Design
Other device
* Use a noise filter designed for Inverters. A general-purpose noise filter will be less effective and may not reduce noise.
Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals (Output Side)

Connect the Terminal Block to the Load
Connect motor output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 to motor lead wires U, V, and W. Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward command. Switch over any two of the output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse to the forward command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to the Output Terminals

If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuit of the Inverter will be damaged. Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, or W/T3.
2-19
2-2 Wiring
Never Short-circuit or Ground the Output Terminals

Never touch the output terminals by hand. If the output wires come into contact with metal materials, an electric shock or ground fault will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Be careful not to short-circuit the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advance Capacitor or Noise Filter

Doing so may result in damage to the Inverter or cause the parts to burn. Never connect a phase advance capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to the output circuit.
Design
Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch

If a load is connected to the Inverter during running, an inrush current will actuate the overcurrent protective circuit in the Inverter. Do not connect an electromagnetic switch or magnetic contactor (MC) to the output circuit.
Install a Noise Filter on the Output Side

Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce induction and radio noise.
Power supply Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) Inverter 3G3JX Noise filter 3G3AX-NFO
Signal line
Induction noise Controller
Radio noise AM radio
Induction noise: Electromagnetic induction can generate noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction. Radio noise: Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and I/O cables can cause the radio receiver to generate noise.
Countermeasures Against Induction Noise

To reduce induction noise from the output side, the following method is also effective. Run the cables collectively through the mounted metal pipe. Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line reduces induction noise.
Power supply Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) Inverter 3G3JX 30 cm min. Signal line Controller
2-20
2-2 Wiring
Cable Length Between Inverter and Motor

Use a cable of 50 m or less between the Inverter and the motor. If the cable length is increased, the stray capacitance between the Inverter outputs and the ground is increased proportionally. An increase in stray capacitance causes high-frequency leakage current to increase, affecting the current detector in the Inverter's output unit and peripheral devices. If your system configuration requires a cable length of 50 m or more, perform the following: Wire in metallic ducts. Use separate cables for each phase. Set the Inverter to a lower carrier frequency (b083).
Design
Do Not Use Single-phase Motors

A single-phase motor uses the capacitor start method or split-phase start method to determine its rotation direction at startup, and thus is not suitable for the variable speed control via the Inverter. Do not use single-phase motors. * If a capacitor start motor is used, the capacitor may be damaged by a sudden electric charge and discharge caused by Inverter output. If a split-phase start motor is used, the startup coil may burn because the centrifugal switch does not operate.
2-21
2-2 Wiring Specifications of the Control Circuit Terminals

Terminal symbol Terminal name and function External power supply terminal for input signal (input).......................At sink logic Internal power supply output terminal for input signal (output)......At source logic Multi-function input terminals S1 to S5 Select 5 functions among the 31 functions and allocate them to from terminals S1 to S5. The terminal allocation is changed automatically when the emergency shutoff function is used. Refer to "Emergency Shutoff Input Function" (page 4-45). Input signal common Analog frequency monitor/ Analog output current monitor Frequency reference power supply Default setting Specifications 24 V DC 10% 30 mA max. 24 V DC 10% 100 mA max.
PSC
S1 S2 Input signal S3 S4
Forward/Stop Reverse/Stop Fault reset Emergency stop fault Multi-step speed reference 1 Analog frequency monitor 10 V DC 10 mA max. 0 to 10 V DC Input impedance 10 k When installing variable resistors at FS, FV, and FC (1 to 2 k) 4 to 20 mA DC Input impedance 250 Contact input Close: ON (Start) Open: OFF (Stop) Minimum ON time: 12 ms min.
Design
S5 SC Monitor signal AM
FS
Frequency reference input
FV
Voltage frequency reference signal
FI FC
Current frequency reference signal Frequency reference common Multi-function output terminal Select the status of the Inverter and allocate it to terminal P1. Output signal common
Frequency arrival signal at a constant speed
P1 Output signal PC MA Relay output signal MB
27 V DC 50 mA max.
MB
MA
MC
MC
Under normal operation : MA-MC Closed Under abnormal operation or power shutdown : MA-MC Open (Default)
Contact ratings 250 V AC 2.0 A (resistance load) 100 V AC min. 0.2 A (inductive load) 10 mA 30 V DC 3.0 A (resistance load) 5 V DC 0.6 A (inductive load) 100 mA
2-22
2-2 Wiring Functions and Connections of the Control Circuit Terminals

Terminal function Contact input (for switching function) Terminal symbol S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 P24 SC Power supply PSC Terminal name Function and connecting method Select functions and allocate them to terminals S1 to S5. (The figure below illustrates the wiring of the sink logic.) Multi-function input
SC S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
Wire size
Design
Internal 24 V DC 24 V DC output Input common Input signal common If the multi-function input is set as the sink logic, the PSC terminal acts as an external power supply input terminal. If the multi-function input terminal is set as the source logic, the PSC terminal acts as an internal power supply output terminal.
Input power supply
FS
Frequency External voltage directive is 0 to 9.8 V. reference power (Nominal input: 10 V) *1 supply output FS FV FI FC FS FV FI FC Frequency reference Input (Voltage directive) Frequency reference Input (Current directive) Frequency reference common
+ -
FV External analog frequency reference
FI
Variable resistor (1/2 W min.) 1 to 2 k
0 to 9.8 V DC (Nominal input: 10 V) Input impedance 10
FS FV FI FC
Shield wire of 0.14 to 0.75 mm2 Recomme nded wire size: 0.75 mm2
FC
Monitor output
AM
Multi-function analog output
4 to 19.6 mA DC (Nominal input: 20 mA) Choose from frequency or output current. Output terminal specifications 0 to 10 V DC full-scale 1 mA max.
AM
SC
P1 Open Collector Output PC MA MB MC
Multi-function output *2
PC
P1 RY
Output terminal specifications Open collector output 27 V DC max. 50 mA max.
Multi-function output common Relay output Relay output common
Select the status of the Inverter and allocate it to terminal P1. Selection of functions is the same as the multi-function output.*3 *4
Relay output
*1. Simultaneous input of current and voltage is not possible. Do not connect the signal lines simultaneously. *2. By factory default, multi-function output P1 is set to NO contact. To switch to NC contact, change the C031 setting.
2-23
2-2 Wiring
*3. Below are the contact specifications of the relay output.

Output terminal Contact capacity Max. MA-MC Min. Max. MB-MC Min. 100 V AC 10 mA 5 V DC 100 mA 100 V AC 10 mA 5 V DC 100 mA 250 V AC 1 A 30 V DC 1 A 250 V AC 0.2 A 30 V DC 0.2 A Resistance load 250 V AC 2.5 A 30V DC 3 A Inductive load 250 V AC 0.2 A 30 V DC 0.7 A
Design
*4. By factory default, the relay output (MA, MB) contact selection (C036) is set at NC contact between MA-MC, and
NO contact between MB-MC.
Mode Selector
RS-485 Communication/Operator Selector (S7)
Select the mode according to the option connected to the communications connector. When using the 3G3AX-OP01 supplied with the Inverter, it is available regardless of the switch condition.
Symbol S7 Name RS-485 communication/ operator selector Status 485 OPE [Default] Description RS485 ModBus communication Digital Operator (Option: 3G3AX-OP1)
Emergency shutoff selector (S8)

Use this selector to enable the emergency shutoff input function.
Symbol Name Emergency shutoff selector Status ON OFF [Default] Description Emergency shutoff input enabled *1 Normal
S8
*1 The multi-function input terminal 3 is switched to a terminal for emergency shutoff input, and the allocation of other multi-function input terminals is also changed automatically. Do not set to ON immoderately. For details, refer to "Emergency Shutoff Input Function" (page 4-45).
2-24
2-2 Wiring
Conforming to EC Directives
Conforming Standards
EMC directive EN 61800-3 Low-voltage directive EN 61800-5-1
Concept of Conformity
Design
EMC Directive
OMRON products are the electrical devices incorporated and used in various machines or manufacturing equipment. For this reason, we make efforts to conform our products to their related EMC standards so that the machines or equipment which have incorporated our products should easily conform to the EMC standards. The 3G3JX models have conformed to the EMC directive EN 61800-3 by following the installation and wiring method as shown below. Your machines or equipment, however, vary in type, and in addition, EMC performance depends on the configuration, wiring, or location of the devices or control panels which incorporate the EC directive conforming products. This in turn does not allow us to confirm the condition and the conformity in which our products are used. Therefore, we appreciate confirmation of the final EMC conformity for the whole machine or equipment on your own.
Wiring the Power Supply

Be sure to connect the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and power supply via an EMC conforming dedicated noise filter 3G3AX-EFI. Keep the ground cable as short as possible. Keep the cable between the Inverter and the noise filter as short as possible.
Connecting a Motor to the Inverter

When connecting a motor to the Inverter, be sure to use shielded braided cables. Keep the cables as short as possible.
Low-voltage Directive
The 3G3JX models have conformed to the EMC directive EN61800-5-1 by performing the machine installation and wiring as shown below. The 3G3JX models are an open type device. Be sure to install it inside the control panel. The power supply and voltage (SELV) with reinforced or double insulation should be used for wiring to the control circuit terminals. To satisfy requirements of the LVD (low-voltage) directive, the Inverter must be protected with a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) in case a short-circuiting accident occurs. Be sure to install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power supply side of the Inverter. Use one molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) per Inverter. Use the crimp-type terminal with an insulation sleeve to connect to the main circuit terminals. When not using the braking resistor or braking resistor unit, connect the crimp-type terminal with an insulation sleeve to the braking resistor connection terminals (P/+2, N/-).
2-25
Chapter 3 Operation
3-1 Test Run Procedure ......................................... 3-3 3-2 Test Run Operation.......................................... 3-4 3-3 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator ............................................................ 3-9 3-4 Operation Procedure (Example: Factory Default) ........................................................................... 3-11 3-5 Keys................................................................... 3-17 3-6 Parameter Transition ....................................... 3-18 3-7 Parameter List .................................................. 3-20
3Operation
WARNING
Do not remove the front cover during the power supply and 5 minutes after the power shutoff. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock. Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock. The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated. Do not change wiring, mode change switches (S7, S8), optional devices or replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Operation
CAUTION
Do not touch the Inverter fins, braking resistors and the motor, which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff. Doing so may result in a burn. Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) that matches the Inverter capacity on the power supply side. Not doing so might result in damage to property due to the short circuit of the load.
Safety Information
Operation and Adjustment
Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be changed easily from low to high. Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Precautions for Use

Error Retry Function
Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is turned off before resetting the alarm because the machine may abruptly start.
Non-Stop Function at Momentary Power Interruption

Do not come close to the machine when selecting restart in the non-stop function at momentary power interruption selection (b050) because the machine may abruptly start after the power is turned on.
3-1

Operation
3-2
3-1 Test Run Procedure
3-1 Test Run Procedure

Item Description Reference page 2-1 Installation and Mounting Install the Inverter according to the installation conditions.
3
Wiring and Connection
Make sure that the installation conditions are met.

Connect to the power supply and peripheral devices. 2-6
Operation
Select peripheral devices that meet the specifications, and wire correctly.
Power On Check the following before turning on the power.
Make sure that an appropriate power supply voltage is supplied and that the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) are wired correctly. 3G3JX-A2: 3-phase 200 to 240 V AC 3G3JX-AE: 1/3-phase 200 to 240 V AC (Connect to L1 and N/L3 for 1 phase) 3G3JX-A4: 3-phase 380 to 480 V AC Make sure that the motor output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3) are connected to the motor correctly. Make sure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly and that all control terminals are turned off. Set the motor to no-load status (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system). After checking the above, turn on the power.
Display Status Check Make sure that there are no faults in the Inverter.
When the power is turned on normally, the display shows: RUN LED indicator : ON ALARM LED indicator : OFF POWER LED indicator : ON RUN command LED indicator : ON Volume LED indicator : ON Data LED indicator (frequency) : ON Data display : Displays the set value in d001. If an error occurs, the error code is displayed on the data display. In this case, refer to "Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations" and make the necessary changes to remedy.
Parameter Initialization Initialize the parameters.
Set parameter No. b084 to "02", and press the keys simultaneously.
Parameter Settings Set the parameters required for a test run.
key while holding down the
and
Set the motor capacity selection (H003) and the motor pole number selection (H004).
No-load Operation Start the no-load motor via the Digital Operator.
Use the FREQ adjuster on the Digital Operator to rotate the motor.
Actual Load Operation Connect the mechanical system and operate via the Digital Operator.
If there is no problem with the no-load operation, connect the mechanical system to the motor and operate via the Digital Operator.
Operation
Refer to "Chapter 4 Functions", and set the necessary parameters.
3-3
3-2 Test Run Operation

Power On
Checkpoints Before Turning On the Power
Make sure that an appropriate power supply voltage is supplied and that the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) are wired correctly. 3G3JX-A2: 3-phase 200 to 240 V AC 3G3JX-AE: 1/3-phase 200 to 240 V AC (Connect to L1 and N/L3 for 1 phase) 3G3JX-A4: 3-phase 380 to 480 V AC Make sure that the motor output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3) are connected to the motor correctly. Make sure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly and that all control terminals are turned off. Set the motor to no-load status (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system).
Operation
Power On
After checking the above, turn on the power.
Display Status Check

When the power is turned on normally, the display shows: [Normal] RUN LED indicator (during RUN) POWER LED indicator Volume LED indicator Data display : ON ALARM LED indicator : OFF : ON RUN command LED indicator : ON : ON Data LED indicator (frequency) : ON : Displays the set value in d001
If an error occurs, refer to "Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations" and make the necessary changes to remedy. [Fault] RUN LED indicator (during RUN) : ON ALARM LED indicator : ON POWER LED indicator : ON RUN command LED indicator : ON Volume LED indicator : ON Data LED indicator (frequency) : ON Data display : An error code, such as "E-01", is displayed. (The display varies depending on the type of error.)
3-4
Parameter Initialization
Initialize the parameters using the following procedure. To initialize the parameters, set parameter b084 to "02".
Key sequence Display example Description
k0.0 bk-k-kbk0k0k1 bk0k8k4 0k0 0k2 bk0k8k4
Power On
Operation
Press the Mode key once, and then press the Decrement key three times to display "b---".
Press the Mode key. "b001" is displayed.
Use the Increment or Decrement key to display "b084".
Press the Mode key. The set value in "b084" is displayed.
Use the Increment or Decrement key to display "02".
Press the Enter key. The set value is entered and "b084" is displayed.
Press the STOP/RESET key while holding down the Mode and Decrement keys simultaneously. When the display blinks, release the STOP/RESET key first, and then the Mode and Decrement keys.
=k.k0k0
(In 1 s)
Displays initialization.
dk0k0k1
The parameter number is displayed again in approximately 1 s.
3-5
3-2 Test Run Operation Setting the Motor Capacity Selection (H003) and Motor Pole Number Selection (H004)
Parameter No. Register No. Name Description Setting range 200-V class 0.2/0.4/0.75/ 1.5/2.2/3.7/ 5.5/7.5 400-V class 0.4/0.75/1.5/ 2.2/3.7/5.5/7.5 2/4/6/8 Unit of setting Default setting Interrupt during RUN
H003
1165h
Motor capacity selection
Sets the capacity of the motor connected to the Inverter.
kW
Varies with the capacity.
No
Operation
H004
1166h
Motor pole number selection
Sets the pole number of the motor connected to the Inverter.
Pole
No
Key sequence
Display example
Description
bk-k-khk-k-khk0k0k3 0.2k0 0.4k0 0.4k0

(In approx. 1 s)
Press the Mode key twice to display the mode selection.
Use the Increment or Decrement key to display "H---".
Press the Mode key. "H003" is displayed.
Press the Mode key. The set value in "H003" is displayed.
Use the Increment or Decrement key to set the rated motor capacity.
Press the Enter key. The set value is entered.
hk0k0k3
The parameter number is displayed again.
3-6
No-load Operation
Start the no-load motor (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system) using the Digital Operator. * Before operating the Digital Operator, check that the FREQ adjuster is set to "MIN." * Make sure that the LED indicator above the FREQ adjuster and the RUN command LED indicator are lit.
Forward/Reverse Rotation via the Digital Operator
Key sequence
Display example
Description Press and hold the Mode key for 3 seconds or more to display "d001", and then press again. (Monitors the frequency reference.)
Operation
0.0 0.0 1k0.0k0

Stopping the Motor
Press the RUN key. The RUN command LED indicator is lit.
Turn the FREQ adjuster slowly. The monitor value of the frequency reference is displayed. The motor starts rotating forward in accordance with the frequency reference.
By turning the FREQ adjuster, make sure that there is no vibration or abnormal sound from the motor. Make sure that no errors have occurred in the Inverter during operation. Switch between forward and reverse with the operator rotation direction selection (F004).
After completing the no-load operation, press the STOP/RESET key. The motor will stop.
Actual Load Operation

After checking the operation with the motor in the no-load status, connect the mechanical system and operate with an actual load. * Before operating the Digital Operator, check that the FREQ adjuster is set to "MIN."
Connecting the Mechanical System

After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system. Be sure to tighten all the screws when fixing in the motor axis.
Operation via the Digital Operator

Because a possible error may occur during operation, make sure that the STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible. Use the Digital Operator to operate the Inverter the same way as in no-load operation.
3-7
3-2 Test Run Operation Checking the Operating Status

After making sure that the operating direction is correct and that the Inverter is operating smoothly at a slow speed, increase the frequency reference. By changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, make sure that there is no vibration or abnormal sound from the motor. Make sure that the output current (output current monitor [d002]) is not excessive.
Operation
3-8
3-3 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator

3
Data display RUN command LED indicator
Operation
FREQ adjuster Operation keys
Name POWER LED indicator ALARM LED indicator RUN (during RUN) LED indicator PROGRAM LED indicator
Description Lit when the power is supplied to the control circuit. Lit when an Inverter error occurs. Lit when the Inverter is running. Lit when the set value of each function is indicated on the data display. Blinks during warning (when the set value is incorrect). Displays relevant data, such as frequency reference, output current, and set values. Lit according to the indication on the data display. Hz: Frequency A: Current Lit when the frequency reference source is set to the FREQ adjuster. Sets a frequency. Available only when the frequency reference source is set to the FREQ adjuster. (Check that the Volume LED indicator is lit.) Lit when the RUN command is set to the Digital Operator. (The RUN key on the Digital Operator is available for operation.) Activates the Inverter. Available only when operation via the Digital Operator is selected. (Check that the RUN command LED indicator is lit.) Decelerates and stops the Inverter. Functions as a reset key if an Inverter error occurs. Switches between: the monitor mode (d), the basic function mode (F), and the extended function mode (A, b, C, H).
8k8k8k8
Data display
Data display LED indicator Volume LED indicator FREQ adjuster RUN command LED indicator RUN key
STOP/RESET key
Mode key
3-9
Name Enter key
Description Enters the set value. (To change the set value, be sure to press the Enter key.) Changes the mode. Also, increases the set value of each function. Changes the mode. Also, decreases the set value of each function.
Increment key
Decrement key
Operation
3-10
3-4 Operation Procedure (Example: Factory Default)

3 Displaying the Monitor Mode, Basic Function Mode, and Extended Function Mode
Power On
Operation
1. The data of the set monitor is displayed. (Default is "0.0")
0.0
Press
2. The code of the monitor mode is displayed (as "d001"). Press the Mode key once to return from the code display of the monitor mode to the monitor display.
dk0k0k1
Press
Press
("d002" is displayed.)
dk0k0k2
Press (13 times)
Press (13 times)
(Continued to the next page)
3-11
3. The code of the basic function mode is displayed (as "F001").
fk0k0k1
Press (4 times)
Press (4 times)
4. The extended function mode is displayed (as "A---").
Operation
ak-k-k-
Extended function mode Displays in order of A b C H.
Press (4 times)
Press (4 times)
5. The code of the monitor mode is displayed (as "d001"). Returns to step 2.
dk0k0k1
3-12
Setting Functions
Switch the method of the RUN command. (Digital Operator Control terminal block) To switch the method of the RUN command from the Digital Operator (factory default) to the control terminal block, you need to change the frequency reference selection (A001) from the Digital Operator (02) to the terminal (01).
1. Display the extended function mode (as "A---"). To display "A---", follow the indication method described in "Displaying the Monitor Mode, Basic Function Mode, and Extended Function Mode" (page 3-11). By default, the RUN command LED indicator will light up as the RUN command selection is set to the Digital Operator.
Operation
ak-k-k-
Press
2. The code of the extended function mode is displayed (as "A001").
ak0k0k1
Press
("A002" is displayed.)
ak0k0k2
Press
3. The setting of the extended function mode is displayed (setting in "A002"). "02 (Digital Operator)" (default setting) is displayed in the RUN command selection (A002). The PROGRAM (PRG) LED indicator lights up while the extended function mode setting is displayed.
0k2
Press
3-13
(Change the A002 setting.) Change the RUN command selection to the terminal "01".
0k1
Press
3
Press the Enter key to fix the changed setting data. The RUN command selection is changed to the terminal, and the RUN command LED indicator will go off. You can now change to another extended function code.
4. The code of the monitor mode is displayed (as "A002").
Operation
ak0k0k2
Press (3 times)
5. The extended function mode is displayed (as "A---"). You can now move to another extended function mode, the monitor mode, and the basic function mode.
ak-k-k-
Setting Function Codes

You can enter codes for the monitor mode, basic function mode, and extended function mode directly, as well as through the scrolling method. Below is an example where code d001 of the monitor mode is changed to extended function A029. 1. Display the code of the monitor mode (as "d001").
dk0k0k1
Press
and
simultaneously
3-14
2. Change the function code. You can change the 4th digit when "d" blinks.
dk0k0k1
3
Press (2 times)
Operation
("A001" is displayed.) "A" blinks. Press the Enter key to fix the blinking digit.
ak0k0k1
Press ("A" is entered.)
3. Change the 3rd digit of the function code. "0" of the 3rd digit blinks. Press the Enter key to fix "0" of the 3rd digit as you need not change it. Press the Mode key to start "A" blinking again.
ak0k0k1
Press ("0" is entered.)
4. Change the 2nd digit of the function code. "0" of the 2nd digit blinks. Press the Mode key to start "0" of the 3rd digit blinking again.
ak0k0k1
Press (2 times)
3-15
("A021" is displayed.) "2" of the 2nd digit blinks.
ak0k2k1
Press
3
"1" of the 1st digit blinks. Press the Mode key to start "2" of the 2nd digit blinking again.
5. Change the 1st digit of the function code.
Operation
ak0k2k1
Press
or
(2 times) (8 times)
("A029" is displayed.) "9" of the 1st digit blinks.
ak0k2k9
Press ("9" is entered.)
6. The function code selection is complete.
ak0k2k9
"A029" selection completed.
Press the Mode key to change the data for A029.
(Supplemental Information) If you enter a parameter number that is not included in the parameter list, the display returns to the parameter previously displayed. Press the Enter key to shift the digit to the right, and the Mode key to shift to the left.
3-16
3-5 Keys
3-5 Keys
Name Description Switches between the command setting and the data setting, and between the extended function mode and the basic function mode. With this key, you can always change the display as follows. [Supplemental Information] To jump to "d001" from any function mode, hold down the Mode key for 3 seconds.
Operation
Mode key
k5k8.1
or
fk0k0k1
5k8.0 5k7.9
fk0k0k1
Note: Always press the Enter key to store any changed data.
Increment key Changes the set values, parameters, and commands. Decrement key
RUN key
Starts the operation. Forward/Reverse rotation depends on the "F004" setting.
STOP/RESET key
Stops the operation. Functions as a reset key if an error occurs.
Enter key
Enters and stores changed data. Do not press the Enter key if you don't want to store any changes, for example, if you have changed the data inadvertently.
3-17
3-6 Parameter Transition

*4
dk0k0k1
*4 Press the key
0.0
*4
dk0k8k3
Operation
*4
fk0k0k1
*5
fk0k0k4
*5
*3
ak0k0k1
*1
ak-k-k-
ak0k0k1
*2
0k0k0k0 0k0k0k1 9k9k9k9
*5
*1 *2
bk-k-kck-k-k-
ak0k0k2
0k0k0k0
0k0k0k1 9k9k9k9
*5
hk-k-k-
ak0k0k3
*1. Data is not stored by pressing the Mode key. *2. Press the Enter key to store the data. *3. When you press the Mode key after you return to the parameter number display without storing data in the extended function mode, the mode selection function is selected. *4. When you press the Enter key with d*** or F001 displayed, the monitor value is stored as the initial display that appears when the power is turned on. *5. When you press the Enter key, the first digit of each parameter setting is stored as the initial display that appears when the power is turned on. (Example:
fk0k0k2 , ak-k-k- , etc.)

3-18
* To display a specific monitor when the power is turned on, press the Enter key with that monitor displayed. If a parameter for an extended function code is stored after pressing the Enter key, however, that code (A---, b---, C---, d---, or H---) appears at the next power-on. To prevent this, always press the Enter key again with the desired monitor displayed after storing a parameter.
Operation
3-19
3-7 Parameter List
3-7 Parameter List

Monitor Mode (d) / Basic Function Mode (F)
Parameter No. d001 d002 d003 Name Output frequency monitor Output current monitor Rotation direction monitor Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 0.0 to 400.0 0.0 to 999.9 F: Forward o: Stop r: Reverse 0.00 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 9999. (Enabled when the PID function is selected)
ON OFF S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
Default setting
Changes during operation
Unit
Page
Hz A
4-1
Operation
4-1 4-1
d004
PID feedback value monitor
4-1
d005
Multi-function input monitor
Example) Terminal S4, S2: ON Terminal S5, S3, S1: OFF Example) Terminal P1: ON Terminal MA: OFF
4-2
d006
Multi-function output monitor

MA P1
ON OFF
4-2
d007
Output frequency monitor (after conversion)
0.00 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 9999. 1000 to 3996 (10000 to 39960) (Output frequency Conversion factor of b086)
4-2
d013 d016
Output voltage monitor 0. to 600. Total RUN Time 0. to 9999. 1000 to 9999 100 to 999[h] 0. to 9999. 1000 to 9999 100 to 999[h] 0.0 to 200.0 0. to 9999.
V h
4-3 4-3
d017
Power ON time monitor Fin temperature monitor Fault frequency monitor
4-3
d018 d080 d081 d082 d083 d102
4-3 4-3
Fault monitor 1 (Latest) Error code (condition of occurrence) Output frequency [Hz] Output current [A] Fault monitor 2 Internal DC voltage [V] RUN time [h] ON time [h] Fault monitor 3 DC voltage monitor 0.0 to 999.9
4-4
4-4
3-20
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No. d104 F001
Name Electronic thermal monitor Output frequency setting/monitor Acceleration time 1
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 0.0 to 100.0 Starting frequency to 1st or 2nd max. frequency 0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000. 0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000. 0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000. 0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000. 00: Forward 01: Reverse
Default setting
Changes during operation Yes
Unit
Page
% Hz
4-4 4-5
F002
10.0
Yes
4-5
Operation
F202
*2nd acceleration time 1
10.0
Yes
4-5
F003
Deceleration time 1
10.0
Yes
4-5
F203
*2nd deceleration time 1 Operator rotation direction selection
10.0
Yes
4-5
F004
00
No
4-6
* 2nd control is displayed when SET(08) is allocated to one of from C001 to C005.
Extended function mode

Parameter No. Function name Frequency reference selection *2nd frequency reference selection RUN command selection *2nd RUN command selection Base frequency *2nd base frequency Maximum frequency *2nd maximum frequency Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster) 01: Terminal 02: Digital Operator (F001) 03: ModBus communication 10: Frequency operation result Default setting Changes during operation No Unit Page
A001
00
4-7
A201
00
No
4-7
A002 Basic setting
A202 A003 A203 A004 A204
01: Terminal 02: Digital Operator 03: ModBus communication 30. to Max. frequency [A004] 30. to Max. frequency [A204]
02
No
4-7
02 60. 60. 60.
No
4-7
No
Hz
4-8
30. to 400. 60.
No
Hz
4-9
* 2nd control is displayed when SET (08) is allocated to one of from C001 to C005.
3-21
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No.
Function name
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 02: Switches between FV/FREQ adjuster via terminal AT 03: Switches between FI/FREQ adjuster via terminal AT 04: FV input only 05: FI input only
Default setting
Unit
Page
A005
FV/FI selection
02
No
4-9
Analog input
A011 A012 A013 A014 A015 A016
FV start frequency 0.0 to Max. frequency FV end frequency FV start ratio FV end ratio FV start selection FV, FI sampling Multi-step speed reference 0 0.0 to Max. frequency 0. to 100. 0. to 100. 00: External start frequency (A011 set value) 01: 0 Hz 1. to 17.
0.0 0.0 0. 100. 01 8.
No No No No No No
Hz Hz % %
4-10 4-10 4-10
Operation
4-10 4-10 4-11
Multi-step speed, Jogging
A020
0.0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency
6.0
Yes
Hz
4-11
A220
*2nd multi-step speed reference 0
0.0/Starting frequency to 2nd max. frequency
6.0
Yes
Hz
4-11
3-22
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No. A021 A022 A023 A024
Function name Multi-step speed reference 1 Multi-step speed reference 2 Multi-step speed reference 3 Multi-step speed reference 4 Multi-step speed reference 5 Multi-step speed reference 6 Multi-step speed reference 7 Multi-step speed reference 8 Multi-step speed reference 9 Multi-step speed reference 10 Multi-step speed reference 11 Multi-step speed reference 12 Multi-step speed reference 13 Multi-step speed reference 14 Multi-step speed reference 15
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator)
Default setting 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Unit
Page
Operation
A025 A026 A027 Multi-step speed, Jogging A028 A029 A030 A031 A032 A033 A034 A035 A038
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 6.00
Yes
Hz
4-11
Jogging frequency 0.00/Starting frequency to 9.99 Jogging stop selection 00: Free-run stop 01: Deceleration stop 02: DC injection braking stop
Yes
Hz
4-12 4-49 4-12 4-49
A039
00
No
3-23
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No. A041 A241 A042
Function name Torque boost selection *2nd torque boost selection Manual torque boost voltage *2nd manual torque boost voltage Manual torque boost frequency *2nd manual torque boost frequency V/f characteristics selection *2nd V/f characteristics selection Output voltage gain 20. to 100. *2nd output voltage gain DC injection braking selection DC injection braking frequency DC injection braking delay time DC injection braking power DC injection braking time DC injection braking method selection 0.0 to 50.0 0.0 to 20.0
Default setting 00
Unit
Page
00: Manual torque boost only 01: Automatic (simple) torque boost 00 5.0
No
4-12
3
Yes % 4-12
Characteristics, Torque boost
A242
0.0
Operation
A043
2.5 Yes 0.0 % 4-12
A243
A044
A244
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC) 01: Reduced torque characteristics (VP 1.7th power) 06: Special reduced torque characteristics (Special VP)
00 No 00 4-12 4-76 Yes 100. % 4-12 4-12
A045 A245
100.
A051
00: Disabled 01: Enabled 02: Frequency control [A052 set value] 0.0 to 60.0 0.0 to 5.0 0. to 100. 0.0 to 60.0 00: Edge operation 01: Level operation
00
No
4-15
DC injection braking
A052 A053 A054 A055
0.5 0.0 50 0.5
No No No No
Hz s % s
4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15
A056
01
No
4-15
3-24
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No. A061 A261 A062 Upper/Lower limit, Jump A262 A063 A064 A065 A066 A067 A068 A071 A072 A073 A074 PID control A075
Function name Frequency upper limit *2nd frequency upper limit Frequency lower limit *2nd frequency lower limit Jump frequency 1 Jump frequency width 1 Jump frequency 2 Jump frequency width 2 Jump frequency 3 Jump frequency width 3 PID selection PID P gain PID I gain PID D gain PID scale PID feedback selection
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 0.0/Frequency lower limit to Max. frequency 0.0/Frequency lower limit to 2nd Max. frequency 0.0/Starting frequency to Frequency upper limit 0.0/Starting frequency to 2nd frequency upper limit
Default setting 0.0
Unit
Page
No 0.0 0.0 No 0.0 0.0 0.5
Hz
4-19
Hz
4-19
Operation
Jump frequency: 0.0 to 400.0 Jump frequency width: 0.0 to 10.0
0.0 0.5 0.0 0.5 No Hz 4-19
00: Disabled 01: Enabled 0.2 to 5.0 0.0 to 150.0 0.00 to 100.0 0.01 to 99.99 00: FI 01: FV 02: RS485 communication 10: Operation function output 00: OFF (Deviation = Target value - Feedback value) 01: ON (Deviation = Feedback value - Target value) 0.00 to 100.0 00: Always ON 01: Always OFF 02: OFF during deceleration 200-V class: 200/215/220/230/240 400-V class: 380/400/415/440/460/480
00 1.0 1.0 0.0 1.00
No Yes Yes Yes No
s s Time
4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20
A076
00
No
4-20
A077
Reverse PID function PID output limit function AVR selection AVR voltage selection
00
No
4-20
A078
0.0
No
4-20
A081 AVR
02 200/ 400
No
4-23
A082
No
4-23
3-25
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No. A085
Function name RUN mode selection Energy-saving response/ accuracy adjustment Acceleration time 2 *2nd acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 *2nd deceleration time 2 2-step acceleration/ deceleration selection *2nd 2-step acceleration/ deceleration selection 2-step acceleration frequency *2nd 2-step acceleration frequency 2-step deceleration frequency
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: Normal operation 01: Energy-saving operation
Default setting 00
Changes during operation No
Unit
Page
4-23
A086
0 to 100
50
No
4-23
3
0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000. 15.00 Yes 15.00 15.00 Yes 15.00 s 4-24 s 4-24
A092 A292 A093 RUN mode, Acceleration/Deceleration functions A293
Operation
0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000.
A094
00 00: Switched via multi-function input 09 (2CH) 01: Switched by setting 00 No 4-24
A294
A095
0.0 0.0 to 400.0 0.0 No Hz 4-24
A295
A096
0.0 0.0 to 400.0 No 0.0 00: Line 01: S-shape curve 00: Line 01: S-shape curve Hz 4-24
A296
*2nd 2-step deceleration frequency Acceleration pattern selection Deceleration pattern selection
A097 A098
00 00
No No
4-25 4-25
3-26
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No. External frequency adjustment A101 A102 A103 A104 A105
Function name
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 0.0 to 400.0 0.0 to 400.0 0. to 100. 0. to 100. 00: Use FI start frequency [A101] 01: 0 Hz start 00: Digital Operator (F001) 01: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster) 02: Input FV 03: Input FI 04: RS485 communication
Default setting 0.0 0.0 0. 100. 01
Changes during operation No No No No No
Unit
Page 4-10 4-25 4-10 4-25 4-10 4-25 4-10 4-25 4-10 4-25 4-26
FI start frequency FI end frequency FI start ratio FI end ratio FI start selection Operation frequency input A setting Operation frequency input B setting
Hz Hz % %
Operation
Operation frequency
A141
01
No
A142
02
No
4-26
A143
00: Addition (A + B) Operator selection 01: Subtraction (A - B) 02: Multiplication (A B) Frequency addition amount 0.0 to 400.0
00
No
4-26
Frequency addition
A145
0.0
Yes
Hz
4-26
A146
Frequency addition direction
00: Adds A145 value to output frequency 01: Subtract A145 value from output frequency
00
No
4-26 4-10 4-27 4-10 4-27 4-10 4-27 4-10 4-27 4-10 4-27
A151 A152 A153 A154 A155
VR start frequency 0.0 to 400.0 VR end frequency VR start ratio VR end ratio VR start selection 0.0 to 400.0 0. to 100. 0. to 100. 00: Use VR start frequency [A151] 01: 0 Hz start
0.0 0.0 0. 100. 01
No No No No No
Hz Hz % %
3-27
VR adjustment
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No.
Function name
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: Alarm 01: 0 Hz start 02: Frequency matching start 03: Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 0.3 to 25.0
Default setting
Unit
Page
b001 Restart during momentary power interruption
Retry selection
00
No
4-27
b002
Allowable momentary power interruption time Retry wait time Momentary power interruption/ undervoltage trip during stop selection Momentary power interruption retry time selection Starting frequency at frequency pullin restart Electronic thermal level
1.0
No
4-27 4-27 4-53
b003
0.3 to 100.0
1.0
No
Operation
b004
00: Disabled 01: Enabled
00
No
4-28
b005
00: 16 times 01: No limit 00: Frequency at interruption 01: Max. frequency 02: Set frequency
00
No
4-28
b011
00 Rated current
No
4-28
b012 Electronic thermal b212
0.2 Rated current to 1.0 Rated current *2nd electronic thermal level Electronic thermal characteristics selection *2nd electronic thermal characteristics selection Rated current 00 00: Reduced torque characteristics 1 01: Constant torque characteristics 02: Reduced torque characteristics 2 00
No
4-29
b013
No
4-29
b213
3-28
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No. b021 b221
Function name Overload limit selection *2nd overload limit selection Overload limit level
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: Disabled 01: Enabled in acceleration/constant speed operation 02: Enabled in constant speed operation
Default setting 01
Unit
Page
No 01 1.5 Rated current
4-31
3
Overload limit
b022
0..1 Rated current to 1.5 Rated current b222 *2nd overload limit level Overload limit parameter 0.1 to 3000.0 b223 b028 b228 *2nd overload limit parameter Overload limit source selection *2nd overload limit source selection Deceleration rate constant at frequency pull-in restart Frequency pull-in restart level 1.0 00 00: b022, b222 set values 01: Input terminal FV 00 1.5 Rated current 1.0
No
4-31
Operation
b023
No
4-31
No
4-31
Frequency pull-in
b029
0.1 to 3000.0
0.5
No
4-28
b030
0.2 Rated current to 2.0 Rated current 00: Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON. 01: Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON. 02: Data other than b031 cannot be changed. 03: Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed. 10: Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed.
Rated current
No
4-28
Lock
b031
Soft lock selection
01
No
4-33 4-56
3-29
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No.
Function name Selection of nonstop function at momentary power interruption Starting voltage of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Stop deceleration level of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Deceleration time of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Deceleration starting width of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Overvoltage protection proportional gain during deceleration Overvoltage protection integral time during deceleration AM adjustment Starting frequency Carrier frequency Initialization selection Initialization parameter selection
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: Disabled 01: Enabled (Stop) 02: Enabled (Restart)
Default setting
Unit
Page
b050 Non-stop function at momentary power interruption
00
No
4-33
b051
0.0 to 1000.
0.0
No
4-33
Operation
b052
0.0 to 1000.
0.0
No
4-33
b053
0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000 to 3000
1.0
No
4-33
b054
0.0 to 10.0
0.0
No
Hz
4-33
b055
0.2 to 5.0
0.2
Yes
4-35
Others
b056
0.0 to 150.0 0. to 255. (Shared with C086 for AM offset adjustment) 0.5 to 9.9 2.0 to 12.0 00: Clears the trip monitor 01: Initializes data 02: Clears the trip monitor and initializes data 00 * Do not change.
0.2
Yes
4-35 4-35 4-75 4-36 4-36 4-76 4-38
b080 b082 b083 Initialization b084
100. 1.5 3.0 00
Yes No No No
Hz kHz
b085
00
No
4-38
3-30
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No.
Function name Frequency conversion coefficient STOP key selection Free-run stop selection
Default setting
Changes during operation Yes No No
Unit
Page
b086 b087
0.1 to 99.9 00: Enabled 01: Disabled 00: 0 Hz start 01: Frequency pull-in restart 01: Output frequency monitor 02: Output current monitor 03: Rotation direction monitor 04: PID feedback value monitor 05: Multi-function input monitor 06: Multi-function output monitor 07: Frequency conversion monitor 00: Deceleration Stop 01: Free-run stop
1.0 00 00
4-39 4-39 4-39 4-53
b088
Operation
b089
Monitor display selection
01
Yes
4-40
b091 b092 Others b130 b131
Stop selection
00 01 00 380/ 760
No No No Yes
4-39 4-40 4-41 4-41
00: Always ON Cooling fan control 01: ON during RUN 02: Depends on the fin temperature Overvoltage LAD stop function Overvoltage LAD stop function level setting Overvoltage protection function selection during deceleration Overvoltage protection level setting during deceleration Overcurrent suppression function Automatic carrier reduction Ready function selection 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 200-V class: 330. to 395. 400-V class: 660. to 790. 00: Disabled 01: Enabled
b133
00
No
4-35
b134
200-V class: 330. to 395. 400-V class: 660. to 790. 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 00: Disabled 01: Enabled
380/ 760
No
4-35
b140 b150 b151
01 00 00
No No No
4-42 4-42 4-42
3-31
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No.
Function name
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: FW (forward) 01: RV (reverse) 02: CF1 (multi-step speed setting binary 1) 03: CF2 (multi-step speed setting binary 2) 04: CF3 (multi-step speed setting binary 3) 05: CF4 (multi-step speed setting binary 4) 06: JG (jogging) 07: DB (external DC injection braking) 08: SET (2nd control) 09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration) 11: FRS (free-run stop) 12: EXT (external trip) 13: USP (USP function) 15: SFT (soft lock) 16: AT (analog input switching) 18: RS (reset) 19: PTC (thermistor input) 20: STA (3-wire start) 21: STP (3-wire stop) 22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse) 23: PID (PID enabled/disabled) 24: PIDC (PID integral reset) 27: UP (UP/DWN function accelerated) 28: DWN (UP/DWN function decelerated) 29: UDC (UP/DWN function data clear) 31: OPE (forced operator) 50: ADD (frequency addition) 51: F-TM (forced terminal block) 52: RDY (ready function) 53: SP-SET (special 2nd function) 64: EMR (emergency shutoff *1) 255: No function *1. The EMR is set forcibly with switch S8, not with parameters.
Default setting
Unit
Page
C001
Multi-function input 1 selection *2nd multi-function input 1 selection Multi-function input 2 selection *2nd multi-function input 2 selection Multi-function input 3 selection *2nd multi-function input 3 selection Multi-function input 4 selection *2nd multi-function input 4 selection Multi-function input 5 selection *2nd multi-function input 5 selection Multi-function input 1 operation selection Multi-function input 2 operation selection Multi-function input 3 operation selection Multi-function input 4 operation selection Multi-function input 5 operation selection
00
C201
00
3
01
C002
Operation
C202
01
C003
18 No 18 4-43
C203 Multi-function input terminals
C004
12
C204
12
C005
02
C205
02
C011
00
C012
00 00: NO 01: NC
C013
00
No
4-44
C014
00
C015
00
3-32
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No.
Function name
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: RUN (signal during RUN) 01: FA1 (constant speed arrival signal) 02: FA2 (over set frequency arrival signal) 03: OL (overload warning) 04: OD (excessive PID deviation) 05: AL (alarm output) 06: Dc (disconnection detection) 07: FBV (PID FB status output) 08: NDc (network error) 09: LOG(logic operation output) 10: ODc (Do not use.) 43: LOC (light load detection signal) 00: Output frequency 01: Output current
Default setting
Unit
Page
C021
Multi-function output terminal P1 selection
00
3
Multi-function output setting C026 Relay output (MA, MB) function selection
No
4-62
05
Operation
C028
AM selection Multi-function output terminal P1 contact selection Relay output (MA, MB) contact selection Light load signal output mode Light load detection level Overload warning level *2nd overload warning level Arrival frequency during acceleration Arrival frequency during deceleration PID deviation excessive level PID FB upper limit
00
No
4-35 4-75
C031
00 00: NO contact at MA; NC contact at MB 01: NC contact at MA; NO contact at MB 01 00: Enabled during acceleration/deceleration/ constant speed 01: Enabled only during constant speed 0.0 to 2.0 Rated current (0.0 setting: Function disable) No 4-71
C036
C038
01 Rated current Rated current
No
4-70
C039 C041 C241 Level output status setting
No
4-70
0.0: Does not operate 0.1 Rated current to 2.0 Rated current
No Rated current 0.0 No
4-31 4-65
C042
0.0 to 400.0
Hz
4-64
C043
0.0 to 400.0
0.0
No
Hz
4-64 4-20 4-65 4-20
C044 C052 C053
0.0 to 100.0
3.0 100
No
0.0 to 100.0 PID FB lower limit 0.0
No
3-33
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No. C070
Function name Operator/ModBus selection Communication speed selection (Baud rate selection) Communication station No. selection Communication parity selection Communication stop bit selection
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 02: Digital Operator 03: ModBus 04: 4800 bps 05: 9600 bps 06: 19200 bps
Default setting 02
Unit
Page
C071
04
No
4-79
Communication function adjustment
3
1. to 32. 00: No parity 01: Even 02: Odd 1: 1-bit 2: 2-bit 00: Trip 01: Trip after deceleration stop 02: Ignore 03: Free run 04: Deceleration stop 0.00 to 99.99 0. to 1000. 0.0 to 200.0 1. No
C072
Operation
C074
00
No
C075
No
C076
Communication error selection
02
No
4-79
C077 C078 Various adjustment C081
Communication error timeout Communication wait time FV adjustment
0.00 0. 100.0
No No Yes
s ms % 4-74
C082
FI adjustment
0.0 to 200.0
100.0
Yes
4-74
3-34
3-7 Parameter List
Parameter No. C086 C091 C101
Function name AM offset adjustment Not used UP/DWN selection
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 0.0 to 10.0 Use "00". *Do not change. 00: Do not store the frequency data 01: Store the frequency data 00: Trip reset at power-on 01: Trip reset when the power is OFF 02: Enabled only during trip (Reset when the power is ON.) 00: RUN (signal during RUN) 01: FA1 (constant speed arrival signal) 02: FA2 (over set frequency arrival signal) 03: OL (overload warning) 04: OD (excessive PID deviation) 05: AL (alarm output) 06: Dc (disconnection detected) 07: FBV (PID FB status output) 08: NDc (network error) 10: ODc (Do not use.) 43: LOC (light load detection signal) 00: AND 01: OR 02: XOR 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0
Default setting 0.0 00 00
Changes during operation Yes No
Unit
Page 4-35 4-75 4-60
C102
Reset selection
00
No
4-57
Operation
C141
Logic operation function A input
00
No
4-69
Others
C142
Logic operation function B input
01
No
4-69
C143
Logic operator selection Output terminal P1 ON delay Output terminal P1 OFF delay Relay output ON delay Relay output OFF delay Motor capacity selection *2nd motor capacity selection Motor pole number selection *2nd motor pole number selection Stabilization parameter
00
No
4-69
C144 C145 C148 C149
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Factory default
No No No No
s s s s
4-70 4-70 4-70 4-70
H003
Control parameter
H203
200-V class 0.2/0.4/0.75/1.5/2.2/3.7/5.5/7.5 400-V class 0.4/0.75/1.5/2.2/3.7/5.5/7.5
No Factory default 4 No 4 100 Yes Yes
kW
4-76
H004 H204 H006 H206
2 4 6 8
Pole
4-76
% 4-76 4-76 %
0. to 255. *2nd stabilization parameter 100
3-35
Chapter 4 Functions
4-1 Monitor Mode.................................................... 4-1 4-2 Function Mode.................................................. 4-5
4-1 Monitor Mode
4Functions
4-1 Monitor Mode

Output Frequency Monitor [d001]
Displays the output frequency of the Inverter. The monitor LED indicator "Hz" lights up while d001 is displayed. (Display) 0.0 to 400.0: Displays in increments of 0.1 Hz.
Output Current Monitor [d002] Functions

Displays the output current value of the Inverter. The monitor LED indicator "A" lights up while d002 is displayed. (Display) 0.0 to 999.9: Displays in increments of 0.1 A.
Rotation Direction Monitor [d003]

Displays whether the Inverter output is in forward/reverse/stop status. The RUN LED indicator lights up during forward/reverse rotation. (Display) F: Forward o: Stop r: Reverse
PID Feedback Value Monitor [d004]

Displays a feedback value converted by [A075] (PID scale) when the PID selection is enabled ([A071] = 01). "Monitor display" = "PID feedback value (%)" "PID scale" [A075] (Setting) A071: 01 (PID enabled) A075: 0.01 to 99.99 (Can be set in increments of 0.01.) (Display) 0.00 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000 to 9999
: Displays in increments of 0.01. : Displays in increments of 0.1. : Displays in increments of 1.
4-1
4-1 Monitor Mode
Multi-function Input Monitor [d005]

Displays the input status of the multi-function input terminals. C011 to C015 (contact selection) are excluded.
(Example) Multi-function input terminals S4, S2 : ON Multi-function input terminals S5, S3, S1 : OFF
Display ON OFF
: ON : OFF
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
(OFF) (ON) (OFF) (ON) (OFF) Multi-function input monitor
Functions
Multi-function Output Monitor [d006]

Displays the output status of the multi-function output terminals and relay output terminals. C031 and C036 (contact selection) are excluded. This monitor indicates the signal status of the functions (C021 and C026) allocated to each multifunction output terminal.
(Example) Multi-function output terminal P1 Relay output terminal MA : ON : OFF
Display ON OFF
: ON : OFF
MA
(OFF)
P1 (ON)
Output Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) [d007]

Displays a conversion value obtained by multiplying the Inverter output frequency by the coefficient set in [b086]. Displayed value = "Output frequency [d001]" "Frequency conversion coefficient [b086]" (Display) [d007] 0.00 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 9999. 1000 to 3996
: Displays in increments of 0.01. : Displays in increments of 0.1. : Displays in increments of 1. : Displays in increments of 10.
(Setting range) [b086] 0.1 to 99.9: Can be set in increments of 0.1. (Example) When the output frequency [d001] = 50.0 Hz, and the frequency conversion coefficient [b086] = 1.1, the monitor [d007] displays "55.0" through 50.0 1.1 = 55.0.
4-2
4-1 Monitor Mode
Output Voltage Monitor [d013]

Displays the output voltage value (Vac) of the Inverter. The monitor LED indicator "V" lights up. (Display) 0. to 600.: Displays in increments of 1 V.
Total RUN Time [d016] 4

Displays the Inverter RUN time. (Display) 0. to 9999. 1000 to 9999 100 to 999
Functions
: Displays in increments of 1 hour. : Displays in increments of 10 hours. : Displays in increments of 1000 hours.
Power ON Time Monitor [d017]

Displays the total power supply time of the Inverter. (Display) 0. to 9999. : Displays in increments of 1 hour. 1000 to 9999 : Displays in increments of 10 hours. 100 to 999 : Displays in increments of 1000 hours.
Fin Temperature Monitor [d018]

Displays the fin temperature. (Display) 0. to 200.
: Displays in increments of 1 C.
Fault Frequency Monitor [d080]

Displays the number of times the Inverter has tripped. (Display) 0. to 9999. 1000 to 6553
: Displays in increments of 1 time. : Displays in increments of 10 times.
4-3
4-1 Monitor Mode
Fault Monitors 1[d081], 2[d082], 3[d083]

Displays the details of the last three trips. The most recent trip is displayed on trip monitor 1. (Display) Factor (E01 to E60)*1 Output frequency at the time of tripping (Hz) Output current at the time of tripping (A) Internal DC voltage at the time of tripping (V) Total RUN time before the trip (hr) Total power supply time before the trip (hr)
4
*1. Refer to "Error Code List" (page 5-1) and "Trip Monitor Display" (page 5-4). (Trip Monitor Display Sequence)
Functions
(1)Trip factor*2
(2)Trip frequency
(3)Trip current
(4)Trip P-N voltage (5)Total RUN time (6)Power ON time
dk0k8k1
ekLk0k7
6k0.0
4.0
3k9k8.
1k5.
1k8.
*2. Displays _k_k_k_ if there has been no trip.
DC Voltage Monitor [d102]

Displays the main circuit DC voltage of the Inverter. (Display) 0.0 to 999.9
: Displays in increments of 0.1 V.
Electronic Thermal Monitor [d104]

Displays the count integration value of the electronic thermal. An overload trip occurs if it reaches 100% (E05). (Display) 0.0 to 100.0
: Displays in increments of 0.1%.
4-4
4-2 Function Mode
4-2 Function Mode

<Group F: Basic Function Parameter> Output Frequency Setting/Monitor 4
Set the Inverter output frequency. With the frequency reference set to the Digital Operator ([A001] = 02), you can set the output frequency in F001. For other methods, refer to the [A001] section in "Frequency Reference Selection" (page 4-7). If a frequency is set in [F001], the same value is automatically set in multi-step speed reference 0 [A020]. To set the 2nd multi-step speed reference, use [A220], or use [F001] with the SET terminal turned on. To set by using the SET terminal, allocate 08 (SET) to the desired multi-function input.
Parameter No. F001 A020
*
Functions
Function name Output frequency setting/monitor Multi-step speed reference 0 2nd multi-step speed reference 0
Data
Default setting
Unit
6.0
Hz
A220
Related functions
A001, A201, C001 to C005
* To switch to the 2nd multi-step speed, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Set an acceleration/deceleration time for the motor. For a slow transition, set a large value, and for a fast transition, set a small one.
Parameter No. F002
*
Function name Acceleration time 1 2nd acceleration time 1 0.01 to 3000
Data
Default setting
Unit
F202
10.0
F003
*
Deceleration time 1 2nd deceleration time 1 Related functions A004, A204, C001 to C005
F203
* To switch to 2nd acceleration/deceleration time 1, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on.
4-5
4-2 Function Mode
The set time here indicates the acceleration/deceleration time between 0 Hz and the maximum frequency.
Output frequency
Max. frequency A004/A204
Output frequency set value
Actual acceleration time
Actual deceleration time
F002/F202
F003/F203
Functions
Even if a short acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual time cannot be shorter than the minimum acceleration/deceleration time that is determined by the mechanical inertia moment and the motor torque. If you set a time shorter than the minimum time, an overcurrent/overvoltage trip may occur.
Acceleration Time T S
TS =
( J L + J M ) N M 9.55 (T S T L )
Deceleration Time T B TB = ( J L + J M ) N M 9.55 (T B + T L )
JL :Inertia moment of the load converted to the motor shaft [kgm2] JM :Inertia moment of the motor [kgm2] NM :Motor rotation speed [r/min] TS :Max. acceleration torque with the Inverter driving [Nm] TB :Max. deceleration torque with the Inverter driving [Nm] TL :Required driving torque [Nm]
For short-time deceleration, use the regenerative braking unit (optional).
Digital Operator Rotation Direction Selection

Select the direction of motor rotation applied to the RUN command via the Digital Operator. This is disabled at terminals.
Parameter No. F004 Function name Operator rotation direction selection 00: Forward 01: Reverse Data Default setting 00 Unit
4-6
4-2 Function Mode
<Group A: Standard Function Parameter> Frequency Reference Selection

Select the method of the frequency reference.
Parameter No. A001
*
Function name Frequency reference selection 2nd frequency reference selection
Data 00: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster) 01: Terminal 02: Digital Operator (F001) 03: ModBus communication 10: Frequency operation result
Default setting
Unit
00
A201
Related functions
A005, A141 to A143, A145, A146
Functions
* To switch to the 2nd frequency reference, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on.
Data 00 01 02 03 10 FREQ adjuster Voltage or current directive from the terminal. F001 value set via the Digital Operator. ModBus communication Result of the frequency operation function Frequency reference source
RUN Command Selection

Select the method of the RUN/STOP command.
Parameter No. A002
*
Function name RUN command selection 2nd RUN command selection
Data 01: Terminal 02: Digital Operator 03: ModBus communication
Default setting
Unit
02
A202
Related functions
F004, A005, C001 to C005
* To switch to the 2nd RUN command, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on.
Data 01 02 03 RUN command source Turn ON/OFF the FW and RV allocated to the terminal. The STOP command is activated if both Forward/Reverse commands are input simultaneously. Use the STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator. Use the ModBus communication.
4-7
4-2 Function Mode
Base Frequency
Base Frequency and Motor Voltage
Match the Inverter output (frequency/voltage) to the motor rating. Be careful, especially if you set a base frequency at below 50 Hz. Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
Parameter No. A003
*
Function name Base frequency 2nd base frequency
Data 30 to max. frequency [A004]
Default setting
Unit
60.0 30 to max. frequency [A204] A004, A204, A081, A082
Hz
A203
Related functions
* To switch to the 2nd base frequency, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on.
Output voltage
Functions
AVR voltage selection (A082)
Base frequency (A003/A203)
Output frequency (Hz)
If you apply a base frequency of over 60 Hz, a special motor is required. This may require the Inverter to increase its capacity to accommodate a different applicable motor. Select the motor voltage according to the motor specifications. If the voltage exceeds the specified level, the motor may burn out. The Inverter cannot output voltage beyond that of the incoming voltage.
Maximum Frequency
Set the maximum value of the output frequency. The value set here will be the maximum value (e.g.,10 V in the range from 0 to 10 V) of the external analog input (frequency reference). The maximum Inverter output voltage from base to maximum frequencies is the voltage set at AVR voltage selection A082. The Inverter cannot output voltage beyond that of the incoming voltage.
Output voltage
AVR voltage selection (100%) (A082)
Maximum frequency (A004/A204)
4-8
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. A004

*
Function name Maximum frequency 2nd maximum frequency 30 to 400
Data
Default setting
Unit
60.0
Hz
A204
Related functions
A003, A203, A081, A082
* To switch to the 2nd max. frequency, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on.
Analog Input (FV, FI) 4

The Inverter has two types of analog input terminals. FV-FC terminal: 0 to 10 V (voltage input) FI-FC terminal: 4 to 20 mA (current input) Simultaneous inputs are not acceptable. Do not connect the signal lines for inputs FV and FI simultaneously.
Parameter No. Function name Data 02: Switches between FV/FREQ adjuster via terminal AT 03: Switches between FI/FREQ adjuster via terminal AT 04: FV input only 05: FI input only Default setting Unit
Functions
A005
FV/FI selection
02
Related functions
A011 to A016, A101 to A105, A151 to A155, C001 to C005, C081, C082
This function is enabled with the frequency reference set to the terminal block (A001 or A201 = 01). The settings are as follows. (VR: FREQ adjuster)
A005 set value AT terminal input status Analog input enabled OFF FV-FC 02 ON VR OFF FI-FC 03 ON VR OFF FV-FC 04 ON OFF FI-FC 05 ON
If AT is not allocated to any of the multi-function input, this means the AT input = OFF in the above table.
4-9
4-2 Function Mode
External Frequency (Voltage/Current) Adjustment

External Analog Input (Frequency Reference) FV-FC terminal: 0 to 10 V (voltage input) FI-FC terminal: 4 to 20 mA (current input) Also set an output frequency for the FREQ adjuster on the Digital Operator.
Parameter No. A011 A101 A151 A012 A102 A152 A013 A103 A153 A014 A104 A154 A015 A105 A155 Function name FV/FI/VR start frequency 0.00 to 400.0 (Set start/end frequency.) FV/FI/VR end frequency 0.0 Hz Data Default setting Unit
4
0. to 100. (Set a start/end ratio relative to an external frequency reference of between 0 to 10 V and 4 to 20 mA.) 0. % 100.
FV/FI/VR start ratio
Functions
FV/FI/VR end ratio
FV/FI/VR start selection Related functions
00: Start frequency (A011 set value) 01: 0 Hz A005, A016, AT input
01
To input voltage ranging from 0 to 5 V on the FV-FC terminal, set A014 to 50%.
(Example 1) A015/A105 = 00
Max. frequency A012/A102/A152
(Example 2) A015/A105 = 01
Max. frequency A012/A102/A152
A011/A101/A151
A011/A101/A151 Frequency reference 0
Frequency reference
A013/A103 A014/A104 100% (10 V/20 mA/VR max.) /A153 /A154 (0 V/4 mA/VR min.)
A013/A103 A014/A104 100% (10 V/20 mA/VR max.) /A153 /A154 (0 V/4 mA/VR min.)
4-10
4-2 Function Mode
FV, FI Sampling
Set the built-in filter applied to frequency setting signals via external voltage/current input.
Parameter No. A016 Function name FV, FI sampling Related functions 1. to 17. Data Default setting 8. A011 to A016, C001 to C005 Unit Time
Helps remove noise in the frequency setting circuit. Set a larger data value if stable operation cannot be secured because of noise. Note that the larger the data value is, the slower the response time. In case of setting "17", it indicates the setting of 16 moving average calculation disregarding the voltage fluctuation equivalent to 0.1 Hz. Though the frequency becomes less likely to fluctuate, the resolution for analog input decreases. This setting is not suitable for equipment that requires rapid response.
Functions
Multi-step Speed Operation Function

Set different RUN speeds by using codes and switch the set speed via the terminal. For details on the operation and settings, refer to "Multi-step Speed Operation Function" (page 447).
Parameter No. A020
*
Function name Multi-step speed reference 0
Data
Default setting
Unit
6.0 2nd multi-step speed reference 0 Multi-step speed reference 1 Multi-step speed reference 2 Multi-step speed reference 3 Multi-step speed reference 4 Multi-step speed reference 5 Multi-step speed reference 6 Multi-step speed reference 7 Multi-step speed references 8 to 15 F001, C001 to C005, CF1 to CF4 inputs
A220 A021 A022 A023 A024 A025 A026 A027 A028 to A035
0.0/Starting frequency to Max. frequency [A004] 0.0
Hz
Related functions
* To switch to the 2nd multi-step speed reference 0, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on.
4-11
4-2 Function Mode
Jogging Operation Function

The motor rotates while the input is turned ON. For details on the operation and settings, refer to "Jogging Operation" (page 4-48).
Parameter No. A038 A039 Function name Jogging frequency Jogging stop selection Related functions Data 0.00/Starting frequency to 9.99 00: Free-run stop 01: Deceleration stop 02: DC injection braking stop Default setting 6.00 Hz 00 Unit
C001 to C005, JG input
4
The Inverter runs at the speed set in A038 while the JG terminal allocated to one of the multifunction input terminals is turned on. Stop selection is also available in A039.
Functions
Relation Between Torque Boost and V/f Characteristics

Determine the relation of output voltage against output frequency.
Parameter No. A041
*
Function name Torque boost selection 2nd torque boost selection Manual torque boost voltage 2nd manual torque boost voltage Manual torque boost frequency 2nd manual torque boost frequency V/f characteristics selection
Data 00: Manual torque boost 01: Automatic (simple) torque boost 0.0 to 20.0 (Ratio to the value of AVR voltage selection A082) 0.0 to 50.0 (Ratio to base frequency) 00: Constant torque characteristics (VC) 01: Reduced torque characteristics (VP 1.7th power) 06: Special reduced torque characteristics (Special VP) 20. to 100.
Default setting 00 5.0
Unit
A241
A042
*
% 0.0 2.5 % 0.0
A242
A043
*
A243
A044
00
A244
2nd V/f characteristics selection
A045 A245
Output voltage gain 100. A082, H003/H203, H004/H204 % 2nd output voltage gain Related functions
* To switch to the 2nd control, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on.
4-12
4-2 Function Mode Control Method (V/f Characteristics)

Constant Torque Characteristics (VC)
Ouput voltage is proportional to output frequency. While proportional from 0 Hz to base frequency, the output voltage is constant from base to maximum frequencies regardless of the frequency.
Output voltage (100%) Output frequency (Hz)
Base frequency Max. frequency (A003/A203) (A004/A204)
Functions
Reduced Torque Characteristics (VP 1.7th power)

Suitable for a fan or pump that does not require large torque in a low speed range. These provide high efficiency, reduced noise and vibration, owing to reduced output voltage in a low speed range.
Output voltage (100%)
VP (1.7th power of VP) Output frequency (Hz)
0 Base frequency Max. frequency (A003/A203) (A004/A204)
Special Reduced Torque Characteristics (Special VP)

Suitable for a fan or pump that requires torque in a low speed range. These have VC characteristics only for low deceleration in reduced torque characteristics.
Output voltage (100%) VC 0 10% of base frequency a b
VP (1.7th power) Output frequency (Hz) Base frequency Max. frequency (A004/A204) (A003/A203) c
Period a: Provides constant torque characteristics (VC) within a range from 0 Hz to 10% of the base frequency. (Example) If the base frequency is 60 Hz, the Inverter provides constant torque characteristics within a range from 0 to 6 Hz. Period b: Provides reduced torque characteristics within a range from 10% to 100% of the base frequency. The Inverter outputs voltage based on a curve of the 1.7th power of the frequency. Period c: Provides constant voltage within a range from the base frequency to the maximum frequency.
4-13
4-2 Function Mode Torque Boost

This function helps compensate for insufficient motor torque in a low speed range. Compensates for the voltage drop caused by the primary resistance of the motor or by wiring to suppress torque reduction in a low speed range. To select the simple torque boost in the torque boost selection (A041/A241), set the motor capacity selection (H003/H203) and motor pole number selection (H004/H204) according to your motor.
Manual Torque Boost [A042/A242, A043/A243]

Adds the voltage set in A042/A242 and A043/A243 to the V/f characteristics, and outputs the resulting voltage. The addition value is set in percentage terms based on the AVR voltage selection (A082) as 100%. The manual torque boost frequency (A043/A243) is set in percentage terms based on the base frequency as 100%.
Output voltage (100%) Manual torque boost voltage (A042/A242) 0 Manual torque boost frequency (A043/A243)
Functions
V/f characteristics (Example: VC) Base frequency Max. frequency (A003/A203) (A004/A204) Output frequency (Hz)
If you raise the set value of the manual torque boost, be careful about motor overexcitation. Otherwise, the motor may burn out. Should such a situation occur, lower the set value of A042/A242.
Simple Torque Boost [A041/A241]

If simple torque boost is selected in the torque boost selection (A041/A241: 01), it operates to adjust the output voltage depending on the load level. To select simple torque boost in the torque boost selection (A041/A241), set the motor capacity selection (H003/H203) and motor pole number selection (H004/H204) correctly according to your motor. You may avoid a possible overcurrent trip during deceleration by always setting the AVR selection to ON (A081: 00). Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select two or more lower rank motor size than specified.
Output Voltage Gain

Changes the Inverter output voltage in percentage terms based on the AVR voltage selection [A082] as 100%. The Inverter cannot output voltage beyond that of the incoming voltage.
Motor voltage selection (A082) A045 When A045 = 100
Max. frequency (A004/A204)
4-14
4-2 Function Mode
DC Injection Braking (DB)

This function securely stops the motor rotation during deceleration.
Parameter No. Function name DC injection braking selection DC injection braking frequency DC injection braking delay time DC injection braking power Data 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 02: DB when output frequency < A052 0.0 to 60.0 0.0 to 5.0 0. to 100. Default setting Unit
A051
00
A052
0.5 0.0 50 0.5 01 C001 to C005
Hz s % s
A053 A054
Functions
A055 A056
DC injection braking time 0.0 to 60.0 DC injection braking method selection Related functions 00: Edge operation 01: Level operation
Two methods are available for DC injection braking: One is the external method via the multifunction input (external DC injection braking); the other is the internal method performed automatically to stop the motor (internal DC injection braking). Below are operation types: Edge operation: DB operates during the specified time period from the DB signal input. Level operation: DB operates while a signal is being input. Frequency control mode: DB operates when the frequency reaches the specified level during operation. If DC injection braking operates at a high motor speed, an overcurrent trip (E01 to E04) or overload trip (E05) may occur. For internal DC injection braking, the following adjustment may help you avoid such a situation: Lower the DC injection braking frequency (A052). Increase the DC injection braking delay time (A053) For external DC injection braking via the multi-function input, use the external DC injection braking terminal (along with deceleration stop).
External DC Injection Braking (A051 = 00)

Allocate 07 (DB) to the desired multi-function input. DC injection braking can be applied by turning on/off the DB terminal, regardless of the DC injection braking selection (A051). Set the DC injection braking power in A054. If the DC injection braking delay time (A053) is set, the Inverter output will be shut off during the specified time period and the motor goes into free-run status. After the set time elapses, DC injection braking starts. Set the DC injection braking time (A055) via the Digital Operator or the DB terminal while taking into account motor heat generation. Long continuous use of DB may cause the motor to burn out. Perform each setting according to your system after selecting the level or edge operation in A056.
4-15
4-2 Function Mode
(a) Edge operation (A056: 00) (Example 1-a)

FW
(b) Level operation (A056: 01) (Example 1-b)

FW
DB
DB
Output frequency
Output frequency
A055
(Example 2-a)
FW
(Example 2-b)
FW
Functions
DB
DB
Output frequency
Output frequency
A055
(Example 3-a)
FW
(Example 3-b)
FW
DB
DB
Output frequency
Free running
Output frequency
Free running
A053
A055
A053
4-16
4-2 Function Mode
Internal DC Injection Braking (A051 = 01)

Performs DC injection braking to stop the motor without any terminal operation. To use this function, set the DC injection braking selection (A051) to 01. Set the DC injection braking power in A054. Set the frequency for starting DC injection braking in A052. If the DC injection braking delay time (A053) is set, the output is shut off when the frequency reaches the level set in A052 during deceleration, and free-run status arises for the specified period. DC injection braking starts after the set time elapses. Below are edge/level operations in internal DC injection braking. Edge operation: Giving priority to the DC injection braking time (A055), performs DC injection braking for the specified period. DC injection braking is activated for the set time in A055 when the output frequency reaches the set value in A052 after the RUN command (FW) is turned off. Even if the RUN command is turned on during DC injection braking, the latter is effective during the set time in A055. (Example 4-a), (Example 5-a) Level operation: Giving priority to the RUN command, shifts to normal operation, ignoring the DC injection braking time (A055). If the RUN command is turned on during DC injection braking, returns to normal operation, ignoring the set time in A055. (Example 4-b), (Example 5-b)
(a) Edge operation (Example 4-a)
FW
Functions
(b) Level operation (Example 4-b)

FW
Output frequency
Free running
Output frequency
Free running
A052
A053
A055
A052
A053
A055
(Example 5-a)
FW
(Example 5-b)
FW
Output frequency
Output frequency
A052
A055
A052
A055
4-17
4-2 Function Mode
Internal DC Injection Braking (Operates Only at the Set Frequency: A051 = 02)
DC injection braking is enabled when the output frequency becomes lower than the DC injection braking frequency (A052) during operation. Neither external (A051 = 00) nor internal (A051 = 01) DC injection braking is available while this function is selected. Operates only when the RUN command is turned on. DC injection braking starts when both the reference and current frequencies become lower than A052. (Example 6-a) When the reference frequency reaches 2 Hz or higher than the set value in A052, DC injection braking is released and the output returns to normal. (Example 6-a) If the reference frequency is "0" when the operation starts with analog input, the initial operation is DC injection braking because both the reference and current frequencies are "0". (Example 6-b) If the RUN command is turned on with the frequency reference established (or a value larger than the A052 setting is input), the initial operation is normal output.
(Example 6-a)
ON RUN command A052 Frequency reference RUN command A052 Frequency reference
(Example 6-b)
ON
Functions
Output frequency
Output frequency
The operation to return to normal varies depending on the setting of the DC injection braking method selection (A056).
(a) Edge operation (b) Level operation
ON RUN command A052 Frequency reference RUN command A052 Frequency reference
ON
Output frequency A053
Output frequency
4-18
4-2 Function Mode
Frequency Limit
This function limits the Inverter output frequency.
Parameter No. A061
*
Function name Frequency upper limit 2nd frequency upper limit Frequency lower limit 2nd frequency lower limit
Data 0.0/Frequency lower limit [A062] to Max. frequency [A004] 0.0/Frequency lower limit [A262] to Max. frequency [A204] 0.0/Starting frequency to Frequency upper limit [A061] 0.0/Starting frequency to Frequency upper limit [A261]
Default setting 0.0 0.0
Unit
A261
Hz A062 0.0 0.0
A262
Related functions
C001 to C005
Functions
* To switch to the 2nd control, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on. You can set both upper/lower limits to the set frequency. This function does not accept any frequency reference beyond the set limits. Set the upper limit first. Make sure the upper limit (A061/A261) is higher than the lower limit (A062/A262). Neither limit would work if set to 0 Hz.
Set frequency (Hz) Max. frequency A004/A204 A061
A062 Frequency reference
0V 4mA
10V 20mA
If the lower limit is set, the set value is prioritized even if 0 V (4 mA) is input for frequency reference.
Frequency Jump Function

This function helps avoid resonant points of loaded machines.
Parameter No. A063 A065 A067 A064 A066 A068 Function name Jump frequency 1 Jump frequency 2 Jump frequency 3 0.0 to 400.0 Data Default setting 0.0 Hz Jump frequency width 1 Jump frequency width 2 0.0 to 10.0 Jump frequency width 3 Related functions C001 to C005 0.5 Unit
The output frequency cannot be set within the frequency range set in the frequency jump function. The output frequency fluctuates continuously according to the acceleration/deceleration time during both actions. The jump frequency can be set at up to three points.
4-19
4-2 Function Mode
Output frequency A067 A066 A066 A064 A064 Frequency reference A068 A068
A065
A063
PID Function
This function enables process control of such elements as flow rate, air volume, and pressure.
Parameter No. A071 A072 A073 A074 A075 Function name PID selection PID P gain PID I gain PID D gain PID scale 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 0.2 to 5.0 0.0 to 150.0 0.00 to 100.0 0.01 to 99.99 00: FI 01: FV 02: RS485 communication 03: Operation function output 00: Deviation = Target value Feedback value 01: Deviation = Feedback value Target value Data Default setting 00 1.0 1.0 0.0 1.00 Unit
Functions
s s Time
A076
PID feedback selection
00
A077
Reverse PID function
00
A078 C044 C052 C053
PID output limit function 0.00 to 100.0 PID deviation excessive level PID FB upper limit 0.0 to 100.0 PID FB lower limit Related functions 0. to 100.
0.0 3.0 100 0.0
% % % %
d004, A001, A005, C001 to C005, C021, C026
To use this function, set A071 to 01. To switch between enable/disable via the terminal block (external signal), allocate 23 (PID enable/ disable) to the desired multi-function input. Select OFF for enable and ON for disable.
Basic Structure of PID Control (Example)

Target value + 0 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA Deviation
K p 1+
1
Ti s
+ Td s
Control value fs
Normal control of the Inverter
Sensor Transducer
0 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA Kp: Proportional gain Ti: Integral time
Feedback
Td: Derivative time
s: Operator
: Deviation
4-20
4-2 Function Mode Target Value Selection

The target value depends on the terminal selected in frequency reference A001 other than that in A076. You cannot set analog inputs FV and FI to both target and feedback values simultaneously. Do not connect the signal lines for inputs FV and FI simultaneously.
Feedback Selection
Select a terminal for feedback signals in A076. The setting of FV/FI terminal selection A005 is disabled when the control terminal block (terminal) 01 is set in A001.
PID Feedback Value Monitor

You can monitor the PID feedback value in d004. The monitor value is displayed as the multiplied value of the PID scale (A075). Monitor display = Feedback value (%) A075 setting
Functions
Excessive Deviation/Output
You can set the PID deviation excessive level (C044) during PID control. If the PID deviation reaches the PID deviation excessive level (C044), the multi-function output terminal is turned on. C044 can be set from 0 to 100. The setting corresponds to the range of 0 to the maximum target value. Allocate 04 (OD) to any of the multi-function output terminal P1 selection (C021) or relay output (MA, MB) function selection (C026).
PID Feedback (FB) Upper/Lower Limit

If the feedback value exceeds the upper limit set in C052, FBV, which is allocated to the multifunction output terminal, turns on. If the value falls below the lower limit set in C053, FBV turns off.
PID Operation
P Operation
Operation where the control volume is proportional to the target value
Step transition Ramp transition
Target value
Large A072 Large A072 Small
Control volume
Small
I Operation
Operation where the control volume increases linearly according to time
Target value
Small A073 Small A073 Large
Control volume
Large
4-21
4-2 Function Mode
D Operation
Operation where the control volume is proportional to the variation ratio of the target value
Target value
Large A074 Large A074
Control volume
Small Small
PI operation is the combination of the above P and I operations; PD is P and D operations; PID is P, I and D operations.
PID Gain Adjustment

If a stable response cannot be obtained in PID function operation, adjust each gain as follows according to the situation.
Functions
Feedback value variation is slow when the target value is changed. The feedback value changes fast but isn't stable. The target and feedback values wouldn't match smoothly. The feedback value fluctuates unstably. Response is slow even with P gain raised. With P gain raised, the feedback value fluctuates and isn't stable.
Raise P gain. Lower P gain. Lower I gain. Raise I gain. Raise D gain. Lower D gain.
PID Integral Reset

Clears the integral value of PID operation. Allocate 24 (PIDC) to the desired multi-function input. Clears the integral value every time the PIDC terminal is turned on. Do not turn on the PIDC terminal during PID operation to avoid an overcurrent trip. Turn on the PIDC terminal after turning off PID operation. The integral value is cleared during free running or retry.
PID Comparison Function

This function outputs a signal when detecting that the PID feedback value exceeds the set range. Allocate 07 (FBV) to any of multi-function output terminal P1 (C021) or relay output terminals MA and MB (C026). Set the upper limit in C052, and the lower limit in C053. When the PID feedback value falls below the lower limit, the terminal is turned on. The ON state will remain until the value exceeds the upper limit. The output signal is turned off while output is shut off (during stop or FRS, etc.). Helps control the number of fans and pumps.
4-22
4-2 Function Mode
AVR Function
This function outputs voltage to the motor correctly even if the incoming voltage to the Inverter fluctuates. With this function, output voltage to the motor is based on that set in the AVR voltage selection.
Parameter No. A081 Function name AVR selection AVR voltage selection Data 00: Always ON 01: Always OFF 02: OFF during deceleration 200-V class: 200/215/220/230/240 400-V class: 380/400/415/440/460/480 d004, A001, A005 Default setting 02 Unit
A082
200/400
Related functions
Functions
With A081 (AVR selection), set whether to enable or disable this function. Note that the Inverter cannot output voltage beyond that of the incoming voltage. To avoid a possible overcurrent trip during deceleration, set the AVR selection to "Always ON" (A081: 00).
Parameter No. Data 00 01 Description Always ON Always OFF OFF during deceleration Note Enabled during acceleration, constant speed operation, and deceleration. Disabled during acceleration, constant speed operation, and deceleration. Disabled only during deceleration in order to reduce the energy regenerated to the Inverter by increasing the motor loss. This will avoid a possible trip due to regeneration during deceleration.
A081
02
Automatic Energy-saving Operation Function

This function automatically adjusts the Inverter output power to a minimum during constant speed operation. This is suitable for the load of reduced torque characteristics, such as a fan and pump.
Parameter No. A085 A086 Function name RUN mode selection Data 00: Normal operation 01: Energy-saving operation Default setting 00 50 Unit %
Energy-saving response/ 0 to 100% accuracy adjustment
To operate with this function, set the RUN mode selection (A085) to 01. You can adjust the response and accuracy in the energy-saving response/accuracy adjustment (A086). Controls the output power at a comparatively slow rate. Should rapid load fluctuation like impact load occur, the motor may stall, resulting in an overcurrent trip.
Parameter No. Data 0 A086 100 Fast Low Large Response Slow Accuracy High Energy-saving effect Small
4-23
4-2 Function Mode
2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Function

This function changes the acceleration/deceleration time during such operations.
Parameter No. A092
*
Function name Acceleration time 2 2nd acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 2nd deceleration time 2 2-step acceleration/ deceleration selection 0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000. 0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000.
Data
Default setting 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 00
Unit s s s s
A292
A093
*
A293
A094
00: Switched via multi-function input 09 (2CH) 01: Switched by setting
A294
00: Switched via multi-function input 09 2nd 2-step acceleration/ (2CH) deceleration selection 01: Switched by setting 2-step acceleration frequency 2nd 2-step acceleration frequency 2-step deceleration frequency *2nd 2-step deceleration frequency Related functions 0.0 to 400 0.0 to 400 0.0 to 400 0.0 to 400
00
Functions
A095
*
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 F002, F003, F202, F203, C001 to C005
Hz Hz Hz Hz
A295
A096
*
A296
* To switch to the 2nd control, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on. The acceleration/deceleration time can be switched via the multi-function input terminal or automatically with an arbitrary frequency. To switch via the multi-function input terminal, allocate 09 (2CH) to it.
(Example 1) When A094/A294 is set to 00
FW

FW
2CH
Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 Acceleration 2 A095/A295 Deceleration 1 Acceleration 1 Deceleration 1 A096/A296 Deceleration 2
Acceleration 1
Output frequency
Output frequency
F002/F202 A092/A292 A093/A293 F003/F203
F002/F202 A092/A292 A093/A293 F003/F203
4-24
4-2 Function Mode
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern
This function is used when smooth acceleration/deceleration is needed.
Parameter No. A097 A098 Function name Acceleration pattern selection Deceleration pattern selection Data 00: Line 01: S-shape curve 00: Line 01: S-shape curve Default setting 00 00 Unit
Acceleration/deceleration pattern can be set according to each system.
4
Parameter No. 00 Line
Set value 01 S-shape curve
Functions
A097 (Acceleration)
Output frequency
Output frequency
Time
Time
A098 (Deceleration)
Output frequency
Time
Output frequency
Time
Description
Accelerates/Decelerates linearly before reaching the set output frequency value.
Helps prevent the collapse of cargo on the elevating machine or conveyor.
External Frequency Adjustment Function (FI)

Parameter No. A101 A102 A103 A104 A105 Function name FI start frequency FI end frequency FI start ratio FI end ratio FI start selection Related functions 0.00 to 400.0 0.00 to 400.0 0. to 100. 0. to 100. 00: External start selection 01: 0 Hz Data Default setting 0.0 0.0 0. 100. 01 Unit Hz Hz % %
A005, A011 to A015, A016, A151 to A155, AT input
For each item, refer to "External Frequency (Voltage/Current) Adjustment" (page 4-10).
4-25
4-2 Function Mode
Operation Frequency Function

This function makes calculations for two inputs and reflects the result as the output frequency.
Parameter No. A141 A142 Function name Operation frequency input A setting Operation frequency input B setting Operator selection Related functions Data 00: Digital Operator (F001) 01: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster) 02: Input FV 03: Input FI 04: RS485 communication 00: Addition (A + B) 01: Subtraction (A - B) 02: Multiplication (A B) A001 = 10 Default setting 01 02 Unit
A143
00
Functions
Inputs FV and FI cannot be set simultaneously. Do not connect the signal lines for inputs FV and FI simultaneously.
Digital Operator FREQ adjuster Input A Input FV Input FI ModBus communication Digital Operator FREQ adjuster Input B Input FV Input FI ModBus communication A142 A+B AB AB Result of calculation Output frequency A141
A143
A B
Frequency Addition Function

This function adds or subtracts the constant frequency set in A145 to/from the output frequency. Select addition or subtraction in A146.
Parameter No. A145 Function name Frequency addition amount Frequency addition direction Related functions 0.0 to 400.0 00: Adds the A145 value to the output frequency 01: Subtracts the A145 value from the output frequency C001 to C005, ADD input Data Default setting 0.0 Unit Hz
A146
00
Inputs FV and FI cannot be set simultaneously. Do not connect the signal lines for inputs FV and FI simultaneously.
4-26
4-2 Function Mode
FREQ adjuster Terminal block
A001
Frequency reference source
+ F001 set value ModBus communication Logic operation output
+/
Output frequency setting
A146 Addition direction setting A145 Frequency addition [ADD] Multi-function input
VR Adjustment Function
Parameter No. A151 A152 A153 A154 A155 Function name VR start frequency VR end frequency VR start ratio VR end ratio VR start selection Related functions 0.00 to 400.0 0.00 to 400.0 0. to 100. 0. to 100. 00: External start selection 01: 0 Hz Data Default setting 0.0 0.0 0. 100. 01 Unit Hz Hz % %
Functions
A005, A011 to A015, A016, A101 to A105, AT input
For each item, refer to "External Frequency (Voltage/Current) Adjustment" (page 4-10).
<Group B: Detailed Function Parameter> Momentary Power Interruption/Trip Retry (Restart)

This function allows you to determine the operation performed when a trip occurs due to momentary power interruption, undervoltage, overcurrent, or overvoltage. Set the retry condition according to your system.
Parameter No. Function name Data 00: Outputs an alarm after a trip. 01: Restarts from 0 Hz at retry. 02: Matches the frequency at retry and starts. 03: Starts the frequency pull-in retry and trips after deceleration stop. 0.3 to 25.0 Trips if the momentary power interruption is within the set time. If not, it restarts. 0.3 to 100.0 Time from recovery to restart Default setting Unit
b001
Retry selection
00
b002
Allowable momentary power interruption time Retry wait time
1.0
b003
1.0
4-27
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No.
Function name Momentary power interruption/ undervoltage trip during stop selection Momentary power interruption retry time selection 00: Disabled 01: Enabled
Data
Default setting
Unit
b004
00
b005
00: 16 times 01: No limit
00
b011
00: Frequency at interruption Starting frequency at 01: Max. frequency frequency pull-in restart 02: Set frequency Deceleration rate constant at frequency pull-in restart Frequency pull-in restart level Related functions 0.1 to 3000.0
00
b029
0.5
b030
0.2 Rated current to 2.0 Rated current C021, C026
Rated current
Functions
Trip Retry Function

Select the retry function during operation in [b001] (01 or 02). If [b005] is 00 (default), the following operations are to be performed. At the time of momentary power interruption and undervoltage: Restarts 16 times and trips on the 17th time. At the time of overcurrent and overvoltage: Restarts 3 times respectively and trips on the 4th time. Retry times are counted separately for momentary power interruption, undervoltage, overcurrent, and overvoltage. For example, an overvoltage trip occurs only after 3-time overcurrent trips and then 4-time overvoltage trips. For momentary power interruption and undervoltage, if [b005] is set to 01, the retry operation continues until the status is cleared. You can select the operation for momentary power interruption and undervoltage during stop in b004. (Supplemental Information) Frequency matching start: Restarts the motor without stopping it after matching the motor rotation speed. (If the RUN command is set on the Digital Operator (A002 = 2), the Inverter stops.) Below is the timing chart where the retry function (b001: 02) is selected.
(Example 1) Duration of momentary power interruption < Allowable duration of momentary power interruption (b002) Power supply Inverter output Free running Motor rotation speed t0 t1 Alarm ON t2 t1 Motor rotation speed t0 (Example 2) Duration of momentary power interruption > Allowable duration of momentary power interruption (b002) Power supply Inverter output Free running
ON Alarm OFF OFF [t0: Duration of momentary power interruption / t1: Allowable duration of momentary power interruption (b002) / t2: Retry wait time (b003)]
4-28
4-2 Function Mode Alarm Selection for Momentary Power Interruption/Undervoltage During Stop
Use b004 to select whether to enable an alarm output in case of momentary power interruption or undervoltage. An alarm output continues while Inverter control power supply remains. Alarm output for momentary power interruption and undervoltage during stop (Examples 3 and 4) (Example 3) b004: 00
While the Inverter is stopped
OFF RUN command ON OFF
While the Inverter is running Power supply ON

OFF OFF
Power supply ON
RUN command ON Inverter output Alarm ON
Inverter output Alarm ON

OFF
OFF
Functions
(Example 4) b004: 01
While the Inverter is stopped Power supply ON
OFF RUN command ON OFF
While the Inverter is running Power supply ON

OFF
RUN command ON Inverter output Alarm ON
OFF
Inverter output Alarm ON

OFF
OFF
Electronic Thermal Function

This function electronically protects the motor from overheating. Causes an overload trip (E05) to protect the motor from overheating by setting according to the motor rated current. Provides the most appropriate protection characteristics, taking into account the decline of the motor cooling capability at a low speed. To set a value over the rated current of the motor, be careful of any temperature rise of the motor.
Parameter No. b012
*
Function name Electronic thermal level 2nd electronic thermal level Electronic thermal characteristics selection 2nd electronic thermal characteristics selection
Data
Default setting Rated current
Unit A A
0.2 Rated current to 1.0 Rated current Rated current 00 00
b212
b013
*
b213
00: Reduced torque characteristics 1 01: Constant torque characteristics 02: Reduced torque characteristics 2 C021, C024
Related functions
4-29
4-2 Function Mode Electronic Thermal Level (Motor Protection Level)

(Example) 3G3JX-A2007 Rated current: 4.0 A Setting range: 0.8 to 4.0A
Time before trip (s) Example where electronic thermal level is b012 = 5.0 A
60 4 0 Motor current (A) 4.6 6.0 8.0 (Ratio to the rated (116%) (150%)(200%) current of the Inverter)
Electronic Thermal Characteristics

Frequency characteristics are multiplied by the b012/212 set value above. The lower the output frequency is, the lower the cooling capability of the standard motor's selfcooling fan.
Functions
Reduced Torque Characteristics 1

Multiplied by the time limit characteristics set in b012/212 for each frequency.
(Example) 3G3JX-A2007 (Rated current: 4.0 A), b012 = 4.00 (A), Output frequency = 20 Hz Electronic thermal level
X1.0 X0.8 X0.6 0 5 20 60 Inverter output frequency (Hz) 60 4 0 3.7 4.8 6.4 (92.8%) (120%) (160%) Motor current (A) (Ratio to the rated current of the Inverter) Trip time (s)
Constant Torque Characteristics

Do not skip this setting when using a constant torque motor. Multiplied by the time limit characteristics set in b012/212 for each frequency.
(Example) 3G3JX-A2007 (Rated current: 4.0 A), b012 = 4.00 (A), Output frequency = 2.5 Hz
Electronic thermal level X1.0 60 Inverter output frequency (Hz) 4 0 3.1 4.0 5.32 (77.4%) (100%) (133%) Motor current (A) (Ratio to the rated current of the Inverter) Trip time (s)
X0.667
60
4-30
4-2 Function Mode
Reduced Torque Characteristics 2

Multiplied by the time limit characteristics set in b012/212 for each frequency.
(Example) 3G3JX-A2007 (Rated current: 4.0 A), b012 = 4.00 (A), Output frequency = 40 Hz
Electronic thermal level X1.0 X0.8 60 Inverter output frequency (Hz) 4 0 4.16 7.2 5.4 (104%) (135%) (180%) Motor current (A) (Ratio to the rated current of the Inverter) Time before trip (s)
20
60
4 Overload Limit/Overload Warning Functions
This function helps prevent an overcurrent trip due to rapid load fluctuation in acceleration or constant speed operation.
Parameter No. b021
*
Function name Overload limit selection 2nd overload limit selection Overload limit level
Data 00: Disabled 01: Enable in acceleration/constant speed operation 02: Enabled in constant speed operation
Default setting 01 01 1.5 Rated current 1.5 Rated current 1.0 1.0 00
Unit
b221
b022
*
A A s s
0.1 Rated current to 1.5 Rated current b222 2nd overload limit level Overload limit parameter 2nd overload limit parameter Overload limit source selection 2nd overload limit source selection Overload warning level 0.1 to 3000.0 (Deceleration time while this function is in operation)
b023
*
b223
b028
*
00: b022, b222 set values 01: Input terminal FV 00 Rated current
b228
C041
* C241
0.0: Does not operate. 0.1 Rated current to 2.0 Rated current (Outputs OL signal when the 2nd overload warning level overload warning level is reached.) Related functions C021, C026
A Rated current
* To switch to the 2nd control, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on. The Inverter monitors the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation. If it reaches the overload limit level, the output frequency is lowered automatically according to the overload limit parameter. The overload limit level sets a current value for this function to work. When this function operates, the acceleration time becomes longer than the set time.
4-31
4-2 Function Mode
With the overload limit parameter set too low, an overvoltage trip may occur due to regenerative energy from the motor. This is because of automatic deceleration from this function even during acceleration. Make the following adjustments if this function operates during acceleration and the frequency doesn't reach the target level. Increase the acceleration time. Increase the torque boost. Increase the overload limit level. Use a higher rank Inverter.
Overload limit level b022 Deceleration set by the overload limit parameter Output current Max. frequency A004/A204
Target frequency F001
Functions
Inverter output frequency
b023
You can change the level setting in the overload limit source selection. With 00 selected, the set values of b022 and b222 are applied to the overload limit level. With 01 selected, the analog voltage input between FV and FC is enabled, and 10 V here corresponds to 150% of the rated current. Note that 01 can be set only if PID is disabled and the AT terminal is not set.
Overload Warning
If the load is too large, this function outputs an overload warning signal, allowing you to readjust the overload level. This helps prevent mechanical damage due to an overload in the conveyors, or an operation line stop due to an overload trip of the Inverter. Allocate 03 (OL) to any of multi-function output terminal P1 or relay output terminals.
n
Overload limit level b022 Overload warning level C041 Output current
OL
4-32
4-2 Function Mode
Soft Lock Function

Use this function to prohibit writing of each parameter. This helps prevent data rewrite due to erroneous operation. For the soft lock selection through the signal input from the terminal (b031 = 00 or 01), refer to the Soft Lock Function of the Multi-function Input section in "Soft Lock Function" (page 4-55).
Parameter No. Function name Data 00: Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON. 01: Data other than b031 and specified frequency parameters cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON. 02: Data other than b031 cannot be changed. 03: Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed. 10: Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed. SFT input Default setting Unit
b031
Soft lock selection
01
Functions
Related functions
Momentary Power Interruption Non-stop Function

This function decelerates the Inverter to a stop to avoid a trip or free running in case of power supply disconnection or momentary power interruption during operation.
Parameter No. b050 Function name Selection of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Starting voltage of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Stop deceleration level of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Deceleration time of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Deceleration starting width of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Data 00: Disabled 01: Enabled (Stop) 02: Enabled (Restart) 0.0 to 1000. Default setting 00 Unit
b051
1.0
b052
0.0 to 1000.
0.0
b053
0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000.
1.00
b054
0.00 to 10.00
0.00
Hz
4-33
4-2 Function Mode
Power supply
OFF
Internal DC voltage
b052 b051
Undervoltage level
Output frequency b054 b053 b053
b053
Functions
Operation Description
A If the power is disconnected during operation with the momentary power interruption non-stop function enabled (b050 = 01) and the voltage falls below the momentary power interruption nonstop function starting voltage (b051), the output frequency is decelerated with one stroke in accordance with the momentary power interruption non-stop deceleration starting width (b054) (Internal DC voltage rises due to the regenerative energy generated at this time.) B While deceleration continues in accordance with the momentary power interruption non-stop deceleration time (b053), internal DC voltage increases, and once the voltage reaches the stop deceleration level of non-stop function (b052), deceleration ceases. C Internal DC voltage decreases because there is no power supply during this constant speed operation. D Deceleration starts again according to b053 after the internal DC voltage decreases to b051. Then, after a recurrence from B, the operation eventually stops without a trip. If the internal DC voltage has dropped below the undervoltage level during this function, output is shut off after an undervoltage trip to enter free-run status. (Caution) When the momentary power interruption non-stop deceleration level (b052) is below the momentary power interruption non-stop function starting voltage (b051), the Inverter performs this function by increasing b052 to b051 without an automatic setting change. This function is not reset before completion. To run the Inverter after power recovery during this function, input the RUN command after entering the STOP command when stopped.
4-34
4-2 Function Mode
Overvoltage Control Function During Deceleration

This function helps avoid an overvoltage trip during deceleration. Note that the actual deceleration time may be longer than the set value. This function automatically keeps DC voltage at the set level during deceleration. The aim of this function is the same as the overvoltage LAD stop function, described in b130 and b131. However, these functions have different deceleration characteristics and you can select either function according to your system.
Parameter No. b055 Function name Overvoltage protection proportional gain during deceleration Overvoltage protection integral time during deceleration Overvoltage protection function selection during deceleration Overvoltage protection level setting during deceleration
Internal DC voltage Set level (B134)
Data 0.2 to 5.0
Default setting 0.2
Unit
b056 b133
0.0 to 150.0 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 200-V class: 330 to 395 400-V class: 660 to 790
0.2 00 380/ 760
s V
Functions
b134
t Output frequency
t Normal Overvoltage protection during deceleration
With this function activated, PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant. Though quicker response is expected with a larger proportional gain, control tends to be divergent and may easily lead to a trip. Response also becomes quicker with a shorter integral time, but if too short, it may lead to a trip as well.
AM Adjustment
You can adjust the calibration of the analog voltage (0 to 10 V DC) from the AM terminal on the control terminal block by using the Inverter setting.
Parameter No. b080 C028 C086 Function name AM adjustment AM selection AM offset adjustment 0. to 255. 00: Output frequency 01: Output current 0.0 to 10.0 Data Default setting 100 00 0.0 Unit V
4-35
4-2 Function Mode
Refer to "Analog Output AM Terminal" (page 4-75).

AM output 10V b080 Adjust the gain with reference to voltage at 0%.
C086 Adjust the offset. (Parallel shift)
0 Output frequency or output current
100%
Note: If the offset (C086) is changed, the point to reach 10 V changes accordingly because of parallel movement. To avoid this, adjust the offset (C086) before the gain (b080).
Starting Frequency
Set the frequency to start Inverter output with the RUN signal turned on.
Parameter No. b082 Function name Starting frequency 0.5 to 9.9 Data Default setting 1.5 Unit Hz
Functions
Use mainly to adjust the starting torque. With the starting frequency set high, the starting current increases. Therefore, the current may exceed the overload limit and cause an overcurrent trip.
FW
Output frequency
b082
Output voltage
Carrier Frequency
You can change the PWM waveform carrier frequency output from the Inverter.
Parameter No. b083 Function name Carrier frequency 2.0 to 12.0 Data Default setting 3.0 Unit kHz
With the carrier frequency set high, you can reduce metallic noise from the motor. However, this may increase noise or leakage current from the Inverter. Carrier frequency adjustment also helps avoid mechanical or motor resonance.
4-36
4-2 Function Mode
To raise the carrier frequency, reduce the output current (or derate the rated current) as shown in the graph below.
(1) Side-By-Side installation (ambient temperature:40C)

200-V Class 100% Output current (Rated current %) Output current (Rated current %) 95% 90% 3.7 kW 85% 80% 75% 70% 2 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency [kHz] 0.2 to 2.2 5.5/7.5kW 100% 95% 90% 85% 80% 3.7kW 75% 70% 2 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency [kHz] 400-V Class 0.4 to 2.2kW 5.5/kW
7.5kW
Functions

200-V Class 100% Output current (Rated current %) 7.5kW 95% 90% 0.75kW 85% 80% 3.7kW 75% 70% 65% 60% 2 4 6 8 10 Carrier frequency [kHz] 12 0.2/0.4/2.2/5.5kW Output current (Rated current %) 1.5kW 100% 95% 90% 85% 80% 75% 70% 65% 60% 2 4 6 8 10 Carrier frequency [kHz] 12 3.7kW 2.2kW 0.4 to 1.5/7.5kW 400-V Class 5.5kW

200-V Class 100% Output current (Rated current %) Output current (Rated current %) 0.2 to 2.2 5.5/7.5kW 100% 400-V Class 0.4 to 2.2 5.5/7.5kW
95% 3.7kW 90%
95%
90% 3.7kW 85%
85%
80%
80%
4-37
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter Initialization
You can initialize the rewritten set values and reset to the factory default, or clear trip records. Note that this is not available for RUN and power ON times.
Parameter No. Function name Data 00: Clears the trip monitor 01: Initializes data 02: Clears the trip monitor and initializes data 00: Do not change. Default setting Unit
b084
Initialization selection
00
b085
Initialization parameter selection
00
4
Initialization Method
After setting the parameter, use the following method to initialize.
Functions
(1) Press the STOP/RESET key with the Mode and Decrement keys pressed simultaneously. Release the STOP/RESET key when the display blinks. Release the Mode and Decrement keys.
(2) Initializing
0k0
(3) Initialization completes with "d001" displayed on the monitor.
dk0k0k1
The multi-function input/output terminals are also initialized with this function. To avoid unexpected operation, be sure to re-examine the wiring.
4-38
4-2 Function Mode
Frequency Conversion Coefficient

This function displays a conversion value obtained by multiplying the Inverter output frequency by the coefficient set in [b086]. This helps display the actual physical value on the monitor.
Parameter No. b086 Function name Frequency conversion coefficient Related functions 0.1 to 99.9 d007 Data Default setting 1.0 Unit
Displayed value [d007] = "Output frequency [d001]" x "Frequency conversion coefficient [b086]"
Functions
(Display) [d007] 0.00 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 9999. 1000 to 3996
: Displays in increments of 0.01. : Displays in increments of 0.1. : Displays in increments of 1. : Displays in increments of 10.
(Setting range) [b086] 0.1 to 99.9 : Can be set in increments of 0.1. (Example) When the output frequency [d001] = 50.0 Hz, and the frequency conversion coefficient [b086] = 1.1, the monitor [d007] displays "55.0" through 50.0 1.1 = 55.0.
STOP Key Selection

You can select whether to enable the STOP key on the Digital Operator, even if the RUN command is set to the control terminal block (terminal).
Parameter No. b087 Function name STOP key selection 00: Enabled 01: Disabled Data Default setting 00 Unit
The trip reset function via the STOP/RESET key works according to this setting.
Free-run Stop Selection and Stop Selection

You can select the operation to be performed when the free-run stop input is reset, and select the stop method, deceleration stop or free-run stop.
Parameter No. b088 b091 Function name Free-run stop selection Stop selection Related functions Data 00: 0 Hz start 01: Frequency pull-in restart 00: Deceleration Stop 01: Free-run stop C001 to C005, b003 Default setting 00 00 Unit
For details, refer to "Free-run Stop" (page 4-53) in the Multi-function Input section.
4-39
4-2 Function Mode
Main Unit Monitor Display Selection

You can select what items to display on the monitor when the ModBus communication or the Digital Operator is connected with the communications connector on the Inverter.
Parameter No. Function name Data 01: Output frequency monitor 02: Output current monitor 03: Rotation direction monitor 04: PID feedback value monitor 05: Multi-function input monitor 06: Multi-function output monitor 07: Frequency conversion monitor Default setting Unit
b089
01
Enabled when the power is turned on, if: C070 is set to "02" (Digital Operator), mode selector S7 to "OPE" (Digital Operator), and 3G3AXOP01 is connected; or C070 is set to "03" (ModBus), mode selector S7 to "485" (RS485 ModBus), and ModBus communication is available. With this function enabled, keys other than the STOP/RESET key, and the FREQ adjuster on the Digital Operator are disabled. In case of a trip, any trip code from "E01" to "E60" is displayed. Also refer to "Output Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) [d007]" (page 4-2).
Functions
Cooling Fan Control

Used to operate the built-in cooling fan of the Inverter all the time or only while the Inverter is in operation. This function applies to the Inverter models with a built-in cooling fan.
Parameter No. b092 Function name Cooling fan control Data 00: Always ON 01: ON during RUN 02: Depends on the fin temperature Default setting 01 Unit
Note that the cooling fan keeps operating for 5 minutes right after the power is turned on and after the operation stops.
4-40
4-2 Function Mode
Overvoltage LAD Stop Function

This function helps avoid an overvoltage trip due to regenerative energy from the motor during deceleration. Note that the actual deceleration time may be longer than the set value. If DC voltage exceeds the set level, the Inverter stops deceleration. The aim of this function is the same as the overvoltage control function during deceleration, described in b055 and b056. However, these functions have different deceleration characteristics and you can select either function according to your system.
Parameter No. b130 Function name Overvoltage LAD stop function Overvoltage LAD stop function level setting 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 200-V class: 330. to 395. 400-V class: 660. to 790. Data Default setting 00 380/760 Unit V
b131
Select to enable or disable the overvoltage LAD stop function in b130. Adjust the overvoltage LAD stop function level in b131. The main circuit DC voltage rises because of regenerative energy from the motor once deceleration starts. With the overvoltage LAD stop function enabled (b130: 01), the Inverter stops deceleration temporarily once the main circuit DC voltage has reached the overvoltage LAD stop function level, which is lower than the overvoltage level. Deceleration then resumes if the voltage level falls below the overvoltage LAD stop function level. With the overvoltage LAD stop function enabled (b130: 01), the actual deceleration time may become longer than the set value (F003/F203). This function does not aim to keep the main circuit DC voltage level constant. Therefore, an overvoltage trip may occur if the main circuit DC voltage rises rapidly because of rapid deceleration.
Internal DC voltage
Functions
Overvoltage level Overvoltage protection level during deceleration
Time Output frequency
Deceleration suspended Deceleration started Deceleration suspended
Deceleration restarted
Time
The fluctuation of the internal DC voltage of this function is larger compared to the overvoltage control function during deceleration, described in b055, b056, b133, and b134. These functions aim to avoid overvoltage during deceleration, and you can select either function according to your system.
4-41
4-2 Function Mode
Overcurrent Suppression Function

This function suppresses overcurrent caused by a steep current rise in rapid acceleration. Select to enable or disable the overcurrent suppression function in b140. This function does not operate during deceleration.
Parameter No. b140 Function name Overcurrent suppression function 00: Disabled 01: Enabled Data Default setting 01 Unit
Output frequency
Desired Actual acceleration after suppression operation
Functions
Time Output current Suppression level (about 160% of the rating)
Time
Automatic Carrier Frequency Reduction Function

This function automatically lowers the set carrier frequency when the temperature of the semiconductor inside the Inverter becomes high.
Parameter No. b150 Function name Automatic carrier reduction 00: Disabled 01: Enabled Data Default setting 00 Unit
While this function is activated, the noise from the motor may be heard differently because of automatic change in career frequency.
RDY (Ready) Function

This function prepares for Inverter output to rotate the motor immediately after a RUN command is input. When this function is enabled and the RDY signal is sent to the multi-function input terminal, high voltage is applied to terminals U, V, and W on the main circuit terminal block. This happens even if the motor is stopped with the RUN command turned off. Do not touch the main circuit terminal block.
Parameter No. b151 Function name Ready function selection 00: Disabled 01: Enabled Data Default setting 00 Unit
4-42
4-2 Function Mode
<Group C: Multi-function Terminal Function>

The 3G3JX has five input terminals [S1], [S2], [S3], [S4] and [S5]; one open collector output terminal [P1]; two relay output terminals [MA] and [MB] (SPDT contact); and one analog output terminal [AM].
Multi-function Input Selection

The five input terminals [S1], [S2], [S3], [S4] and [S5] act as multi-function input terminals, whose functions can be changed through reallocation. 31 functions are available for allocation. You can switch the input logic between Sink and Source, and the contact specifications between NO and NC. (NO [normally open] is allocated by factory default.) The terminal with reset allocated is fixed to NO. Multi-function input terminal S3 is also used for emergency shutoff input. With DIP switch S8 on the control PCB turned on, emergency shutoff input works. If a signal is input to terminal S3, the output is shut off and an error occurs, not through software but only through hardware. The same two functions cannot be allocated to the multi-function input terminals. If you attempt to allocate the same two functions to the terminals by mistake, the terminal where you allocated the function last takes precedence. The previous data is set to "255", and the terminal function is disabled. PTC can be allocated only to input terminal [S5]. Parameter No. C001 to C005 correspond to input terminals [1] to [5] respectively.
Functions
4-43
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. C001 C201 C002 C202 C003 C203 C004 C204 C005
Function name Multi-function input 1 selection *2nd multi-function input 1 selection Multi-function input 2 selection *2nd multi-function input 2 selection Multi-function input 3 selection *2nd multi-function input 3 selection Multi-function input 4 selection *2nd multi-function input 4 selection Multi-function input 5 selection
Data 00: FW (forward) 01: RV (reverse) 02: CF1 (multi-step speed setting binary 1) 03: CF2 (multi-step speed setting binary 2) 04: CF3 (multi-step speed setting binary 3) 05: CF4 (multi-step speed setting binary 4) 06: JG (jogging) 07: DB (external DC injection braking) 08: SET (2nd control) 09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration) 11: FRS (free-run stop) 12: EXT (external trip) 13: USP (USP function) 15: SFT (soft lock) 16: AT (analog input switching) 18: RS (reset) 19: PTC (thermistor input) 20: STA (3-wire start) 21: STP (3-wire stop) 22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse) 23: PID (PID enabled/disabled) 24: PIDC (PID integral reset) 27: UP (UP/DWN function accelerated) 28: DWN (UP/DWN function decelerated) 29: UDC (UP/DWN function data clear) 31: OPE (forced operator) 50: ADD (frequency addition) 51: F-TM (forced terminal block) 52: RDY (ready function) 53: SP-SET (special 2nd function) 64: EMR (emergency shutoff) 255: No function
Default setting
Unit
00
01
18
Functions
12
02
C205
*2nd multi-function input 5 selection
C011 C012 C013 C014 C015
Multi-function input 1 operation selection Multi-function input 2 operation selection Multi-function input 3 operation selection Multi-function input 4 operation selection Multi-function input 5 operation selection
00 00: NO 01: NC NO contact: "ON" with the contact closed, "OFF" with the contact open. NC contact: "ON" with the contact open. "OFF" with the contact closed. For the RS terminal, only NO contact is available. 00 00 00 00
* To switch to the 2nd control, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on. Note 1: The terminal with "18" (RS) allocated will automatically have an NO contact specifications. Note 2: "19" (PTC) can only be allocated to multi-function input 5 (C005). Note 3: "64" (EMR) is set forcibly with switch S8, not with parameters.
4-44
4-2 Function Mode
Emergency Shutoff Input Function

Emergency Shutoff Mode Selection
To select Emergency Shutoff mode in the 3G3JX, turn on switch S8 on the right side behind the front cover.
Switch S8 (right side)
4
[Notes] Use caution when turning on/off the DIP switch S8 on the control PCB. That will change the function allocation on the control terminal block automatically. Note 1: This function does not insulate the motor electrically. Use a breaker such as a contactor in the motor wire if necessary. Note 2: This function does not prevent erroneous operation of drive process control and the application function. Note 3: The digital outputs (relay and open collector outputs) of the Inverter are not regarded as the safety signals mentioned here. When you set a safety control circuit as described here, use the output signal of an externally set safety relay.
Functions
Wiring Example
Wiring Example
R(+) T(-) S13 Emergency shutoff S22 S12 S11 S22 S12 A1 A2 R S T R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Run/Stop
S14
13 14 23 24
P24 PSC SC S1 S2 S3 EMR S4 RS S5 S8 = ON
Safety switching device
Inverter
S13: The emergency stop button lets the Inverter go into "Emergency Shutoff" status (or free-run status). S14: Run/Stop button The emergency shutoff circuit is monitored with an externally set safety relay. One safety relay can be used for multiple Inverters.
4-45
4-2 Function Mode
Inputting EMR to the digital input lets the motor go into "Emergency Shutoff" status (or free-run status). This status continues while EMR is turned on or until a reset signal is input. To use the Inverter to control the mechanical brake (used for cranes, etc.), you need to connect the safety output of the external safety relay to the brake control circuit in series. Note 1: For the signal lines for the safety relay and emergency shutoff input, use shielded coaxial cables with 2.8 mm or less in diameter and 2 m or less in length. The shield must be grounded. Note 2: All inductor parts such as the relay and contactor must have overvoltage protection circuits. With switch S8 turned on, multi-function input S3 is automatically allocated to the emergency shutoff signal EMR input terminal, and S4 to the reset signal input terminal. In this case, EMR is allocated to function code C003, and reset (RS) to C004 automatically, and you cannot change these parameters manually. The following table shows the status of switch S8 and the allocation of the multi-function input.
Emergency shutoff selector S8 Multi-function input terminal No. Status 1 2 3 S8 = OFF (Default) 1 FW RV CF1 S8 = OFF ON 2 FW RV EMR * (only for emergency shutoff) RS * (only for emergency shutoff reset) No function allocated S8 = ON OFF 3 FW RV No function allocated
Functions
4 5 (also used for PTC)
CF2
RS (normal reset) No function allocated
RS
In short, when switch S8 is turned on, input terminal S5 automatically switches to "No function allocated" status. To allocate a function to terminal S5 in this status, use the function mode. If switch S8 is turned off later, input terminal S3 switches to "No function allocated" status. To allocate a function, again use the function mode. You can reset Emergency Shutoff status only via the dedicated input terminal (terminal S4 in the above table). The STOP/RESET button on the Digital Operator cannot be used for resetting Emergency Shutoff status. * When switch S8 is ON, the EMR function is forcibly set to NC contact, and the RS function to NO contact.(Parameters C013 and C014 are ignored)
4-46
4-2 Function Mode
Multi-step Speed Operation Function

You can set RUN speeds using codes and switch the set speeds via the terminal.
Data 02 Symbol CF1 Function name Multi-step speed setting binary 1 OFF ON 03 CF2 Multi-step speed setting binary 2 OFF Binary operation 2: OFF Binary operation 3: ON Binary operation 3: OFF Binary operation 4: ON Binary operation 4: OFF ON 04 CF3 Multi-step speed setting binary 3 OFF ON 05 CF4 Multi-step speed setting binary 4 OFF Related functions Required settings C001 to C005 F001, A001 = 02, A020 to A035 Binary operation 1: OFF Binary operation 2: ON Status ON Description Binary operation 1: ON
Functions
By allocating 02 to 05 (CF1 to CF4) to any of the multi-function inputs, you can select the multistep speed from 0 to 15. Note that multi-step speed terminals not allocated to any multi-function input are regarded as "OFF". (e.g., if 02 (CF1) and 03 (CF2) are allocated to multi-function input, the available multi-step speeds should be 0 to 3.) For speed 0, you can change the frequency reference with the frequency reference selection (A001). (e.g., if the frequency reference is set to the control terminal block (terminal, A001: 01), you can change it via input terminals FV and FI.) For speed 0, use A020/A220 if the frequency reference is set to the Digital Operator (A001: 02). Use A021 to A035 to set frequencies for speeds 1 to 15.
4-47
4-2 Function Mode
You can also select a multi-step speed by turning on/off the multi-step speed terminals (CF1 to CF4) and set the multi-step speed frequency with F001.
Multi-step speed terminals Multi-step speed CF4 0th 0 1st 0 2nd 1 3rd 0 4th 0 5th 1 6th 1 7th 8th 0 9th 0 10th 1 11th 1 12th 0 13th 1 14th 1 15th 1 A035 0 A034 1 A033 0 A032 1 A031 0 A030 1 A029 1 0 A027 0 A026 1 A025 0 A024 1 A023 0 A022 1 A021 CF3 CF2 CF1 0 Reference source according to the A001 setting Reflected speed
Functions
A028
Jogging Operation
This function allows you to determine and fine-tune the motor stop position.
Data 06 Symbol JG Function name Jogging operation OFF Related functions Required settings Parameter No. A038 A039 Function name Jogging frequency Jogging stop selection Stop C001 to C005 A002 = 01, A038 > b082, A038 > 0, A039 Data 0.00/Starting frequency to 9.99 00: Free-run stop 01: Deceleration stop 02: DC injection braking stop Default setting 6.00 00 Unit Hz Hz Status ON Description Operates at the set jogging frequency.
Allocate 06 (JG) to the desired multi-function input.
4-48
4-2 Function Mode Jogging Frequency

(When A039 = 01)
JG FW
RV Output frequency A038
If the frequency is set to a higher value, the jogging operation may easily lead to a trip. Adjust A038 so that the Inverter does not trip.
Jogging Stop Selection

Note 1: To perform the jogging operation, turn on the JG terminal before the FW or RV terminal. (Do the same if the RUN command source is set to the Digital Operator.)
Functions
JG
FW
Output frequency
Jogging does not function if the FW signal turns on beforehand.
Note 2: If A039 is set to 02, set the DC injection braking.
External DC Injection Braking

This function securely stops the motor rotation as the motor decelerates to a stop. For internal DC injection braking, refer to "DC Injection Braking (DB)" (page 4-15).
Data Symbol Function name Status ON 07 DB External DC injection braking OFF Related functions Required settings DC injection braking is not performed during deceleration. Description DC injection braking is performed during deceleration.
C001 to C005 A053, A054, A055, A056
If DC injection braking is applied at a high motor speed, an overcurrent trip (E01 to E04) or overload trip (E05) may occur. For internal DC injection braking, the following adjustment may help you avoid such a situation: Lower the frequency for DC injection braking. Increase the DC injection braking delay time (A053). Allocate 07 (DB) to the desired multi-function input. DC injection braking can be applied by turning on/off the DB terminal, regardless of the DC injection braking selection (A051). Set the DC injection braking power in A054. Set the DC injection braking time, taking into account motor heat generation. Long continuous DB may cause the motor to burn out.
4-49
4-2 Function Mode
Perform each setting according to your system after selecting the level or edge operation in A056.
(a) Edge operation (A056 = 00) (Example 1-a)
FW
(b) Level operation (A056 = 01) (Example 1-b)

FW
DB
DB
Output frequency
Output frequency
A055
(Example 2-a)
FW
(Example 2-b)
FW
DB
Functions
DB
Output frequency
A055
Output frequency
(Example 3-a)
FW DB
Free running
(Example 3-b)
FW DB
Free running
Output frequency
A053
A055
Output frequency
A053
4-50
4-2 Function Mode
2nd Control Function and Special 2nd Function

This function is used to operate by switching two different types of motors.
Data 08 Symbol SET Function name 2nd control OFF ON 53 SP-SET Special 2nd function OFF Disables the parameter for the special 2nd motor. C001 to C005 Disables the parameter for the 2nd motor. Enables the parameter for the special 2nd motor. Status ON Description Enables the parameter for the 2nd motor.
Related functions
Functions
By allocating 08 (SET) or 53 (SP-SET) to the desired multi-function input and then turning on/off the SET or SP-SET terminal, you can switch and control two different motors. Switch to the 2nd control function at the SET terminal after turning off the RUN command and the Inverter output. You can switch to the 2nd control function at the SP-SET terminal while in operation. To display and set each parameter for the 2nd control (parameter No.200s), allocate the SET terminal.
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 Motor 2 Inverter Motor 1
SET /SP-SET SC
To display and set each parameter for the 2nd control (parameter No.200s), allocate SET and SPSET. Parameters changeable while in operation are as follows:
Selection Parameter No. F002/F202 F003/F203 A001/A201 A002/A202 A003/A203 A004/A204 A020/A220 A041/A241 Function name SET Acceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1 Frequency reference selection RUN command selection Base frequency Maximum frequency Multi-step speed reference 0 Torque boost selection Yes Yes No No No No Yes No SP-SET Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4-51
4-2 Function Mode
Selection Parameter No. A042/A242 A043/A243 A044/A244 A045/A245 A061/A261 A062/A262 A092/A292 A093/A293 A094/A294 A095/A295 A096/A296 b012/b212 b013/b213 b021/b221 b022/b222 b023/b223 b028/b228 C001 to C005/ C201 to C205 C041/C241 H003/H203 H004/H204 H006/H206 Function name SET Manual torque boost voltage Manual torque boost frequency V/f characteristics selection Output voltage gain Frequency upper limit Frequency lower limit Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 2-step acceleration/deceleration selection 2-step acceleration frequency 2-step deceleration frequency Electronic thermal level Electronic thermal characteristics selection Overload limit selection Overload limit level Overload limit parameter Overload limit source selection Multi-function inputs 1 to 5 selection Overload warning level Motor capacity selection Motor pole number selection Stabilization parameter Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No SP-SET Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Functions
There's no indication of 2nd control functions on the display. You'll see which one is enabled by checking whether the terminal is turned on/off. Switching the 2nd control using SET during operation does not work until the Inverter stops.
2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Function

This function changes the acceleration/deceleration time during such operations.
Data Symbol Function name Status ON 09 2CH 2-step acceleration/deceleration OFF Disables the 2-step acceleration/ deceleration time. Description Enables the 2-step acceleration/ deceleration time.
Related functions
Required settings
C001 to C005 A092, A093, A094 = 00
4-52
4-2 Function Mode
For instructions on how to switch on/off this function automatically with an arbitrary frequency, refer to "2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Function" (page 4-24). To switch via a multi-function input, allocate 09 (2CH) to it.
FW

FW
2CH Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 Acceleration 2 A095/A295 Deceleration 1 Acceleration 1 Output frequency F002/F202 A096/A296 Deceleration 1 Output frequency Deceleration 2
Acceleration 1
F002/F202 A092/A292 A093/A293 F003/F203
Functions
A092/A292 A093/A293 F003/F203
Free-run Stop
This function sets the motor to free running status by shutting off the Inverter output.
Data Symbol Function name Status ON 11 FRS Free-run stop OFF Description Sets the motor to free-run status by shutting off output. The motor is in normal operation. C001 to C005 b003, b088, b091
Related functions
Required settings
This function is effective when you stop the motor using the mechanical brake such as an electromagnetic one. Note that an overcurrent trip may occur if the mechanical brake forces the motor to stop during Inverter output. Allocate 11 (FRS) to the desired multi-function input. Performs a free-run stop (FRS) while the FRS terminal is turned on. When the FRS terminal is turned off, the motor restarts after retry wait time b003 elapses. With RUN command selection A002 set to 01 (control terminal), the motor restarts only if the FW terminal is turned on, even in free running. You can select the Inverter output mode for restart at free-run stop selection b088 (0 Hz start or frequency pull-in restart). (Examples 1, 2) The setting of this function is also applied to stop selection b091.
Parameter No. b088 b003 Function name Free-run stop selection Retry wait time Data 00: 0 Hz start (example 1) 01: Frequency pull-in restart (example 2) 0.3 to 100. Default setting 00 1.0 Unit s
4-53
4-2 Function Mode
(Example 1) 0 Hz start
FW
(Example 2) Frequency pull-in restart

FW
FRS Free running Motor rotation speed 0 0 Hz start
FRS Free running Motor rotation speed 0
b003
Starts at 0 Hz regardless of motor rotation speed. The retry wait time is ignored. An overcurrent trip may occur with this start at a high motor speed.
Frequency pull-in start
After the FRS terminal is turned off, the motor frequency is matched and a frequency pull-in restart is performed without stopping the motor. If an overcurrent trip occurs, extend the retry wait time.
Functions
External Trip
Use this function to trip the Inverter according to the peripheral system conditions.
Data Symbol Function name Status ON 12 EXT External trip OFF Description Sets the motor to free-run status by shutting off output. The motor is in normal operation. C001 to C005
Related functions
When the EXT terminal is turned on, E12 is displayed and the Inverter trips to stop output. Allocate 12 (EXT) to the desired multi-function input.
RUN commands FW and RV EXT terminal Motor rotation speed
Free running
RS terminal
Alarm output terminal
4-54
4-2 Function Mode
Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function

For safety reasons, this function causes a USP trip (E13) while the RUN command (FW/RV) from the control terminal (terminal) is turned on, in either of the following conditions:
When the power is turned on After an undervoltage trip is reset Data Symbol Function name Status ON 13 USP USP function OFF Starts the Inverter with the power turned on while the RUN command is input. C001 to C005 Description Does not start the Inverter with the power turned on while the RUN command is input.
4
Related functions
You can reset a USP trip by tuning off the RUN command (example 1) or resetting the Inverter. The Inverter starts running immediately after a trip reset if the RUN command is still turned on. (Example 2) To return from a USP trip to normal operation, shut off the power, turn off the RUN command, turn on the power again, and then turn on the RUN command. (Example 3) Allocate 13 (USP) to the desired multi-function input. The following shows how this function works.
(Example 1) Power supply FW USP RS Alarm Output frequency (Example 2) Power supply FW USP RS Alarm Output frequency (Example 3) Power supply FW USP RS Alarm Output frequency
Functions
Soft Lock Function

Use this function to prohibit rewriting of each parameter. This helps prevent data rewriting due to erroneous operation.
Data Symbol Function name Status ON 15 SFT Soft lock OFF Description Rewriting is unacceptable except for specified parameters. Depends on the b031 setting. C001 to C005 b031 (soft lock excluded)
Related functions
Required settings
Allocate 15 (SFT) to the desired multi-function input.
4-55
4-2 Function Mode
Select the soft lock setting and performing method from the following table.
Parameter No. Function name Data 00: Data other than b031 cannot be changed when the SFT terminal is ON. 01: Data other than b031 and specified frequency parameters cannot be changed when the SFT terminal is ON. 02: Data other than b031 cannot be changed. 03: Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed. 10: Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed. SFT input Default setting Unit
b031
Soft lock selection
01
Related functions
AT Input Function
This function changes the analog input source by turning on/off the terminal.
Data Symbol Function name Status ON 16 AT Analog input switching OFF Description Depends on the combination with the A005 setting (see the table below). Same as above. C001 to C005 A001 = 01, A005
Functions
Related functions
Required settings
A005 set value AT terminal input status Analog input enabled OFF
00 ON FI-FC OFF
02 ON VR OFF FI-FC
03 ON VR OFF
04 ON OFF
05 ON
FV-FC
FV-FC
FV-FC
FI-FC
If AT is not allocated to any of the multi-function inputs, this means the AT input = OFF in the above table. Refer to "Analog Input (FV, FI)" (page 4-9).
Reset
This function resets an Inverter trip.
Data Symbol Function name Status ON 18 RS Reset OFF Description Shuts off the power if the Inverter is running. Cleared at trip. (The same process as when the power is turned on) Same as above. C001 to C005 C102
Related functions
Required settings
4-56
4-2 Function Mode
You can also reset an Inverter trip by pressing the STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator. In reset selection C102, you can select alarm reset timing and either enable/disable in normal operation. For the RS terminal, only NO contact is available.
Parameter No. Function name Data 00: Trip reset at power-on (example 1) Enabled during normal operation (shuts off output) C102 Reset selection 01: Trip reset at power-off (example 2) Enabled during normal operation (shuts off output) 02: Trip reset at power-on (example 1) Disabled during normal operation (trip reset only) 00 Default setting Unit
Functions
(Example 1) (Example 2)
ON RS OFF ON Alarm OFF Alarm OFF ON RS OFF ON
Thermistor Trip Function

This function protects the motor by tripping with the built-in thermistor detecting a temperature rise.
Data Symbol Function name Status Description
19
PTC
Thermistor input
When the thermistor is connected between terminals S5 and SC, the Inverter can detect motor temperature Connected and, if the temperature exceeds the specified level, trips to shut off the output (E35). The level is fixed. Open If the thermistor is not connected, the Inverter trips (E35) to shut off the output even with this function selected. C005 only
Related functions
Allocate 19 (PTC) to multi-function input 5 (C005). This cannot be used with other multi-function terminals. (Use a thermistor with the PTC characteristics.) Trip level is fixed at 3 k 10% max. For how to connect the thermistor, refer to "Functions and Connections of the Control Circuit Terminals" (page 2-23).
4-57
4-2 Function Mode
3-wire Input Function

This function is effective in using auto recovery contacts such as a press button switch for operation and stop.
Data 20 Symbol STA Function name 3-wire start OFF ON 21 STP 3-wire stop OFF ON 22 F/R 3-wire forward/reverse OFF Forward C001 to C005 A002 = 01 Irrelevant to the motor operation. Reverse Irrelevant to the motor operation. Stops with auto recovery contacts. Status ON Description Starts with auto recovery contacts.
Related functions
Required settings
Functions
Set RUN command selection A002 to 01 (control terminal). The following operations become possible with 20 (STA), 21 (STP), and 22 (F/R) allocated to the multi-function inputs. With the STA and STP terminals allocated, the FW and RV terminals are disabled.
(1) When using STA, STP, and F/R
STA ON OFF
(2) When using STA and STP

STA ON OFF
STP
ON
OFF
STP
ON
OFF
F/R
Output frequency
Forward Reverse
Output frequency
Forward
4-58
4-2 Function Mode
PID Enable/Disable and PID Integral Reset

The PID enable/disable function disables the PID function temporarily through terminal input. This overrides the A071 setting to control the motor frequency. Also, the PID integral reset function clears the PID integral value that has until then been integrated through terminal input. This helps stop the motor when the frequency control is shifted to the PID control. For details on the PID function, refer to "PID Function" (page 4-20).
Data 23 Symbol PID Function name PID enabled/disabled OFF Does not affect the PID function. Forcibly sets the PID integral value to zero. Does not affect the PID function C001 to C005 A071=01 ON 24 PIDC PID integral reset OFF Status ON Description Disables the PID function.
4
Related functions
Required settings
Functions
UP/DOWN Function
This function changes the Inverter output frequency using UP and DWN terminals of the multifunction inputs.
Data Symbol Function name UP/DWN function accelerated Status ON OFF UP/DWN function decelerated ON OFF 29 UDC UP/DWN function data clear ON OFF Description Increases the current speed during the signal input period. Keeps the current speed. Decreases the current speed during the signal input period. Keeps the current speed. Clears the stored UP/DWN speed. Keeps the stored UP/DWN speed. C001 to C005 A001 = 02, C101
27
UP
28
DWN
Related functions
Required settings
While the UP/DWN terminal is turned on, the acceleration/deceleration time depends on F002, F003/F202, and F203. You can store a frequency set value after UP/DWN adjustment. Choose whether to store the value with C101. Also, you can clear the stored frequency set value by allocating 29 (UDC) to the desired multifunction input and turning on/off the UDC terminal.
4-59
4-2 Function Mode
[UP/DOWN Function Enabled/Disabled]

Frequency reference selection (A001) 00 01 02 03 Multi-step speed ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Jogging ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Enabled/Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled
The UP/DOWN function is disabled when the JG operation is enabled. The UP/DOWN function is enabled when the frequency reference selection (A001) is set to the Digital Operator (02). The UP/DOWN function is enabled when the multi-step speed reference is enabled.
Parameter No. Function name Data 00 C101 UP/DWN selection 01 Description Does not store the frequency reference adjusted using UP/DWN. After restoring the power, returns the set value to that before UP/DWN. Stores the frequency reference adjusted using UP/DWN. After restoring the power, maintains the set value after UP/DWN adjustment.
Functions
Note: You can store only two codes: multi-step speed reference 0 (A020) and 2nd multi-step speed reference 0 (A220). Even with C101 set to 01, you cannot store the multi-step speeds 1 to 7 adjusted with the UP/DWN function. To store them, press the Enter key as well.
RUN commands (FW, RV) UP DWN Acceleration/Deceleration does not function if the UP and DWN terminals turn on simultaneously.
Output frequency
Forced Operator Function

This function forcibly switches to operation via the Digital Operator by turning on/off the multifunction terminal if the frequency reference/RUN command sources are not set to the Digital Operator.
Data Symbol Function name Status ON 31 OPE Forced operator OFF Description Prioritizes the command from the Digital Operator (A020, A220 set values) over the A001 and A002 settings. Operates according to the A001 and A002 settings. C001 to C005 A001, A002
Related functions
Related codes
If you switch on/off this function during operation, the RUN command is reset to stop the Inverter. Before resuming operation, stop the RUN command from each command source to avoid possible danger and then input it again.
4-60
4-2 Function Mode
Frequency Addition Function

This function allows you to add/subtract the constant offset frequency to/from the output frequency.
Data Symbol Function name Status ON 50 ADD Frequency addition OFF Description Calculates the set value in A145 against the set frequency in A001 according to the formula specified in A146, in order to provide a new frequency reference. Normal control C001 to C005 A001, A145, A146 A001, A002
Related functions
Required settings
Related codes
FREQ adjuster
A001
Frequency reference source
Functions
Terminal block + F001 set value ModBus communication Logic operation output
+/
Output frequency setting
A146 Addition direction setting A145 Frequency addition [ADD] Multi-function input
Forced Terminal Block Function

This function forcibly switches to operation via the terminal block by turning on/off the multi-function terminal if the frequency reference/RUN command sources are not set to the terminal block.
Data 51 Symbol F-TM Function name Forced terminal block OFF Operates according to the A001 and A002 settings. C001 to C005 A001, A002 Status ON Description Forcibly sets to A001 = 01 and A002 = 01.
Related functions
Required settings
When the input of this signal is reset, A001 and A002 return to the command status prior to the input. If you switch on/off this function during operation, the RUN command is reset to stop the Inverter. Before resuming operation, stop the RUN command from each command source to avoid possible danger and then input it again.
4-61
4-2 Function Mode
Ready Function
Data 52 Symbol RDY Function name Ready function OFF Normal stop status C001 to C005 Status ON Description The Inverter is ready.
Related functions
Inputting this signal shortens the time between the RUN command input and the start of actual operation. In normal status, this is approx. 20 ms. Shortened time through this function varies depending on timing. When the Inverter is in ready status, high voltage is applied to terminals U, V, and W on the main circuit terminal block. This happens even if the motor is stopped with the RUN command turned off. Do not touch the main circuit terminal block.
Functions
Multi-function Output Terminal Selection

Parameter No. Function name Data 00: RUN (signal during RUN) 01: FA1 (constant speed arrival signal) 02: FA2 (over set frequency arrival signal) 03: OL (overload warning) 04: OD (excessive PID deviation) 05: AL (alarm output) 06: Dc (disconnection detection) 07: FBV (PID FB status output) 08: NDc (network error) 09: LOG (logic operation output) 10: ODc (Do not use.) 43: LOC (light load detection signal) Default setting Unit
C021
00
C026
Relay output (MA, MB) function selection
05
You can allocate the following functions to multi-function output terminal P1 and the relay output terminals. While the multi-function output terminal P1 selection is for open collector output (allocated in C021), the relay output (MA, MB) function selection is for SPDT-contact relay output (allocated in C026). You can select NO- or NC-contact output for each output terminal with C031 or C036.
Data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 Description RUN: Signal during RUN FA1: Constant speed arrival signal FA2: Over set frequency arrival signal OL: Overload warning OD: Excessive PID deviation AL: Alarm output Dc: Disconnection detection Frequency arrival signal 4-63 Reference item Signal during RUN Page 4-63
Overload warning signal Excessive PID deviation output Alarm output External analog input disconnection detection
4-65 4-65 4-66 4-66
4-62
4-2 Function Mode
Data 07 08 09 10 43
Description FBV: PID FB status output NDc: Network error LOG: Logic operation output ODc: Do not use. LOC: Light load detection signal
Reference item PID FB status output Network error Logic operation result output
Page 4-67 4-68 4-69
Light load detection signal
4-70
Signal During RUN 4

This function outputs a signal while the Inverter is running.
Data Symbol RUN Function name Signal during RUN OFF Available input terminals Required settings The Inverter is in STOP mode. P1-PC, MA-MC (or MB-MC) C021, C026 Status ON 00 Description The Inverter is in RUN mode.
Functions
Also outputs a signal during DC injection braking. Below is the time chart.
Output frequency FW RUN output
Frequency Arrival Signal

This function outputs a signal when the output frequency has reached the set value.
Data Symbol Function name Status ON 01 FA1 Constant speed arrival signal OFF ON 02 FA2 Over set frequency arrival signal OFF Available input terminals Required settings Description The Inverter output frequency has reached the F001 set value. The Inverter output frequency has fallen below the F001 set value. The Inverter output frequency has exceeded the C042 set value during acceleration. The Inverter output frequency has fallen below the C042 set value during acceleration. P1-PC, MA-MC (or MB-MC) C021, C026, C042, C043
For elevating machines, use this signal for applying the brake.
4-63
4-2 Function Mode
Below is the hysteresis of the frequency arrival signal: ON: (Set frequency - 1% of the maximum frequency) (Hz) OFF: (Set frequency - 2% of the maximum frequency) (Hz)
Parameter No. Function name Arrival frequency during acceleration Data 0.0: Does not output arrival signal during acceleration 0.1 to 400.0: Outputs arrival signal during acceleration 0.0: Does not output arrival signal during deceleration 0.1 to 400.0: Outputs arrival signal during deceleration Default setting Unit
C042
0.0
Hz
C043
Arrival frequency during deceleration
0.0
Hz
Constant Speed Arrival Output (01: FA1)

Outputs a signal when the output frequency has reached the level set in the frequency setting (F001, A020, and A220) or multi-step speed reference (A021 to A035).
f on Output frequency f off Set frequency f on :1% of the max. frequency f off :2% of the max. frequency
Functions
(Example) (Max. frequency fmax = 120 (Hz) Set frequency fset = 60 (Hz) fon = 1200.01 = 1.2 (Hz) foff = 120 0.02 = 2.4 (Hz) FA1 During acceleration:ON at 60 - 1.2 = 58.8 (Hz) During deceleration:OFF at 60 - 2.4 = 57.6 (Hz)
Output Over Set Frequency (02: FA2)

Outputs a signal when the output frequency has exceeded the arrival frequencies during acceleration/deceleration set in [C042, C043 (FA2)].
C042 f on Output frequency f off C043 f on :1% of the max. frequency f off :2% of the max. frequency
FA2
4-64
4-2 Function Mode
Overload Warning Signal

If the load is too large, this function outputs an overload warning signal, allowing you to readjust the load level to prevent a trip. This helps prevent mechanical damage due to an overload, or a conveyor line stop due to an overload trip of the Inverter.
Data Symbol Function name Status ON 03 OL Overload warning OFF The Inverter output current has not reached the C041 set value. Description The Inverter output current has exceeded the C041 set value.
Available input terminals Required settings
P1-PC, MA-MC (or MB-MC) C021, C026, C041
Functions
Parameter No.
Function name
Data
Default setting
Unit
C041
0.0: Does not operate. 0.1 to Rated current 200%: Overload warning level Outputs OL signal when reaching the overload warning level.
Overload limit level b022 Overload warning level C041 Output current
Rated current
OL
Excessive PID Deviation Output

This function outputs a signal when the deviation has exceeded the set value during the use of the PID function.
Data Symbol Function name Status ON 04 OD Excessive PID Deviation OFF Available input terminals Required settings Description The PID deviation has exceeded the C044 set value. The PID deviation has not reached the C044 set value.
P1-PC, MA-MC (or MB-MC) C021, C026, C044
Parameter No. C044
Function name PID deviation excessive level 0.0 to 100.0
Data
Default setting 3.0
Unit %
4-65
4-2 Function Mode
C044 can be set from 0 to 100. The setting corresponds to the range of 0 to the maximum target value.
Feedback value C044 C044 Target value
OD ON ON
4 Alarm Output Functions

This is output when the Inverter trips. If you use the relay for alarm outputs, set and check operation,, as the SPDT contact is used for the terminals. For details, refer to the description of the relay output, "Multi-function Output Terminal ON Delay/OFF Delay" (page 4-70).
STOP RESET
Operation
RUN
Stop
Error
STOP RESET
Error Trip Alarm output
Data 05
Symbol AL
Function name Alarm output
Status ON OFF
Description The Inverter is in trip status. The Inverter is normal.
P1-PC, MA-MC (or MB-MC) C021, C026
External Analog Input Disconnection Detection

Outputs a signal if an error is detected in the external analog inputs (FV, FI).
Data 06 Symbol Dc Function name Disconnection detection OFF Available input terminals Required settings The Inverter is normal. P1-PC, MA-MC (or MB-MC) C021, C026, A001, A005 Status ON Description The Inverter is in trip status.
4-66
4-2 Function Mode
The disconnection detection signal is output if the frequency reference of the external analog input remains below the starting frequency for 500 ms. The signal stops 500 ms after the frequency reference has exceeded the starting frequency. Helps detect disconnection when a frequency reference is issued from the external analog inputs (FV, FI) with the frequency reference selection set to the terminal (A001 = 01). Enabled only when the external analog inputs (FV, FI) are selected. Example 1: Disabled in multi-step speed operation even when the frequency reference is set to the external analog input (A001 = 01). Example 2: Disabled even when the AT terminal selection is set to the FV/volume selection (A005 = 02) or FI/volume selection (A005 = 03) since the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator (volume) with the AT terminal turned on.
4
Starting frequency External analog input frequency reference (FV, FI)
Functions
0Hz External analog input disconnection detection (DC) ON OFF 500 ms 500 ms
PID FB Status Output

When the PID function is used, this function outputs a signal according to the FB value, as illustrated below. This is effective as a RUN command in operating multiple pumps.
Data 07 Symbol FBV Function name PID FB status output OFF Available input terminals Required settings Status ON Description See the figure below. Shifts output when exceeding the upper limit or falling below the lower limit.
P1-PC, MA-MC (or MB-MC) C021, C026, C052, C053
PID FB upper limit (C052)
PID FB value
PID FB lower limit (C053)
FW ON FBV ON OFF ON OFF at output frequency = 0
4-67
4-2 Function Mode
Network Error
This function detects and outputs a network error during RS485 ModBus communication. The error is output during RS485 ModBus communication if the next signal does not come even after the specified time period in C077.
Data 08 Symbol NDc Function name Network error OFF Available input terminals Required settings
Master
Status ON
Description The communication watchdog timer times out. Normal
Functions
Slave Time out
Watchdog timer [C077] NDc
Alarm [C076] = 00 or 01
4-68
4-2 Function Mode
Logic Operation Result Output

This function outputs a logic operation result of the set two status.
Data 09 Symbol LOG Function name Logic operation output OFF Available input terminals Required settings P1-PC, MA-MC (or MB-MC) C021, C026, C141, C142, C143 Status ON See the figure below. Description
4
Multi-function output item used for logic operation RUN, FA1, FA2, OL, OD, AL, Dc, FBV, NDc C141 Input A Logic operation AND, OR, XOR [LOG]
Functions
C142 RUN, FA1, FA2, OL, OD, AL, Dc, FBV, NDc Input B
Input signal Input A (C141) 0 0 1 1 Input B (C142) 0 1 0 1 AND (C143 = 00) 0 0 0 1
[LOG] output OR (C143 = 01) 0 1 1 1 XOR (C143 = 02) 0 1 1 0
[Related Function Codes]

Parameter No. Function name Data 00: RUN 01: FA1 02: FA2 03: OL 04: OD 05: AL 06: Dc 07: FBV 08: NDc 10: ODc (Do not use.) 43: LOC 00: AND 02: XOR 01: OR Default setting Unit
C141
00
C142
01
C143
Logic operator selection
00
4-69
4-2 Function Mode
Light Load Detection Signal

This function outputs a signal when the Inverter output current has fallen below the C039 set value.
Data 43 Symbol LOC Function name Light load detection signal Status ON OFF Description Output current is lower than the C039 set value. Output current is higher than the C039 set value.
4
The signal is output if the load current has fallen below the C039 set value with the light load signal output mode set to 00 or 01 in C038, and LOC (43) allocated to the multi-function output terminal. This function helps avoid a trip resulting from a falling motor current.
Output current C039
Functions
0 [LOC] output 1 0
Parameter No.
Function name Light load signal output mode Light load detection level
Data 00: Enabled during acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration 01: Enabled only during constant speed 0.0 to 2.0 Rated current 0.0: Does not operate
Default setting
Unit
C038
01
C039
Rated current
Multi-function Output Terminal ON Delay/OFF Delay

This function allows you to set ON/OFF delay times respectively from 0.1 to 100 seconds at the signal output of the multi-function output terminals (P1 and relay). The following figure shows the output status.
Parameter No. C144 C145 C148 C149 Function name Output terminal P1 ON delay Output terminal P1 OFF delay Relay output ON delay Relay output OFF delay 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0 Data Default setting 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Unit s s s s
4-70
4-2 Function Mode
ON delay
OFF delay
ON delay
OFF delay
Original signal waveform (without delay)
ON delay only
OFF delay only
4
ON and OFF delays
Functions
Multi-function Output Terminal Contact Selection

This function allows you to set either contact for the two multi-function output terminals respectively.
Parameter No. C031 Function name Multi-function output terminal P1 contact selection Relay output (MA, MB) contact selection 00: NO contact 01: NC contact 00: NO contact between MA and MC 01: NC contact between MA and MC Data Default setting 00 Unit
C036
01
Specifications of the Multi-function Output Terminal P1

Below are the specifications of the multi-function output terminal P1.
Inside the Inverter
PC
P1
C031 set value 00 (NO contact)
Power supply ON
Output status ON OFF
Electrical specifications Between each terminal and PC Voltage drop 4 V max. at power-on Max. allowable voltage: 27 V DC Max. allowable current: 50 mA
OFF 01 (NC contact) ON
ON OFF
OFF
The PC terminal acts as a common terminal at sink/source logics.
4-71
4-2 Function Mode Specifications of the Relay Output Terminals

The relay output terminals are set to the SPDT contact. The following shows their operations. Electrical specifications
Output terminal Max. contact capacity MA-MC Min. contact capacity Max. contact capacity MB-MC Min. contact capacity 100 V AC, 10 mA 5 V DC, 100 mA 100 V AC, 10 mA 5 V DC, 100 mA 250 V AC, 1 A 30 V DC, 1 A 250 V AC, 0.2 A 30 V DC, 0.2 A Resistance load 250 V AC, 2 A 30 V DC, 3 A Inductive load 250 V AC, 0.2 A 30 V DC, 0.6 A
Functions
MB Inside the Inverter
MA MC
(Factory default)
(a) When used as an alarm terminal C036 set value Power supply Inverter status Fault ON 00 OFF ON 01 OFF Normal Closed Open Open Closed Normal Fault Open Open Open Closed Closed Closed Output terminal status MA-MC Closed MB-MC Open
(b) When used as an output terminal C036 set value Power supply Output signal ON ON 00 OFF ON 01 OFF OFF Closed Open Open Closed OFF ON Open Open Open Closed Closed Closed Output terminal status MA-MC Closed MB-MC Open
4-72
4-2 Function Mode
Analog Input
Two types of external analog inputs are available for frequency reference. For voltage input, you can set a frequency from 0 to maximum by applying a voltage from 0 to 10 V between inputs FV and FC. For current input, apply 4 to 20 mA between inputs FI and FC. Note that voltage and current cannot be input simultaneously. Also, do not connect the signal lines for inputs FV and FI simultaneously.
FS Reference voltage (10 V) Voltage input Inverter VR FV FI FC A001 [AT] Frequency setting
Current input Analog ground FS FV FI FC
Functions
A005 set value AT terminal input status Analog input enabled OFF FI-FC
02 ON Volume OFF FI-FC
03 ON Volume OFF
04 ON FV-FC OFF
05 ON FI-FC
Using the External Volume (VR)

This is the general method that can be easily achieved. Connect a variable resistor between terminal FS, a 10-V power supply inside the Inverter, and ground FC, and then connect its output to terminal FV. You can set the frequency by adjusting VR. The external VR should be that of 1 to 2 k, 2W.
FS FV FI FC
External VR: 1 to 2 k, 2 W
Inputting the Voltage

Input the voltage between terminals FV and FC. Input impedance is approx.10 k. Do not input negative voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the Inverter.
FS FV FI FC
+0 to 9.6 V DC 0 to 10 V DC standard
Inputting the Current

Input the current between terminals FI and FC. Input impedance is approx. 250 . For the external analog input indicated above, use a shielded wire for connection and connect the shielded part to FC for stable operation.
FS FV FI FC
4 to 19.6 mA 4 to 20 mA standard
4-73
4-2 Function Mode
FV/FI Adjustment
Parameter No. C081 C082 Function name FV adjustment FI adjustment 0.0 to 200.0 0.0 to 200.0 Data Default setting 100 100 Unit % %
Related functions
A011, A101, A012, A102, A013, A103, A014, A104, A015, A105
You can adjust the FV/FI frequency input. Use this to change the full scale of input. The set frequency becomes 0 Hz with 0.0% set. This returns to the factory default value after initialization.
Set frequency Max. frequency
Functions
200% setting
100% setting
Max. frequency/2
50% setting
0
0V, 4mA 5V, 12mA 10V, 20mA
4-74
4-2 Function Mode
Analog Output AM Terminal

This function allows you to monitor the output frequency and current from the AM terminal on the control terminal block (terminal). Analog voltage output from 0 to 10 V.
AM Selection
Select a signal to output from the following table.
Parameter No. Function name Data 00: Output frequency 0 to 10 V (0 to Max. frequency (Hz)) 01: Output current 0 to 10 V (0% to 200% of the rated current) Default setting Unit
C028
AM selection
00
Related functions
A011, A101, A012, A102, A013, A103, A014, A104, A015, A105
Functions
Output Frequency
Outputs the voltage according to the output frequency, with the maximum frequency being full scale. This is intended for display indication and cannot be used as a line speed signal. Though the accuracy is 5%, this could be exceeded depending on your meter. Outputs a frequency obtained by multiplying the output frequency by the conversion coefficient [b086], with the maximum frequency being full scale.
AM FS FV FI FI
Meter 10V, 1mA
Output Current
Outputs a current value with 200% of the Inverter rated voltage being full scale. The output method is the same as the output frequency. Monitor accuracy is 10% at the halfway point of base frequency.
AM Adjustment
Adjust the calibration of the meter connected to the AM terminal by using the Inverter setting.
Parameter No. b080 C086 Function name AM adjustment AM offset adjustment Related functions
When b080 = 100
AM output 10V b080=0 to 255 AM output 10V C086=0 to 10 Parallel shift 5V 5V
Data 0. to 255. (Adjust to the scale) 0.0 to 10.0 (See the figure below)
Default setting 100. 0.0
Unit V
A011, A101, A012, A102, A013, A103, A014, A104, A015, A105
When C086 = 0.0
0 1/2 FS Full scale (FS) Hz or A
0 1/2 FS Full scale (FS) Hz or A
4-75
4-2 Function Mode
<Group H: Motor Control Parameters> Motor Capacity and Pole Number

Set the capacity and number of poles of the motor connected to the Inverter. With incorrect parameters set, appropriate operation cannot be ensured.
Parameter No. H003
*
Function name Motor capacity selection 2nd motor capacity selection Motor pole number selection 2/4/6/8
Data 200-V class 0.2/0.4/0.75/1.5/2.2/3.7/ 5.5/7.5 400-V class 0.4/0.75/1.5/2.2/3.7/5.5/7.5
Default setting
Unit
Inverter capacity
kW
H203
4
4 Pole
H004
*
H204
2nd motor pole number selection Related functions A041 to A045, A241 to A244
Functions
Stabilization Parameter
This function adjusts to reduce motor hunting.
Parameter No. H006
*
Function name Stabilization parameter 0. to 255. 2nd stabilization parameter
Data
Default setting 100 100 A045, b083
Unit
H206
Related functions
* To switch to the 2nd control, allocate 08 (SET) to the multi-function input terminal and then turn it on. In case of motor hunting, check whether the motor capacity selection (H003/H203) and motor pole number selection (H004/H204) match your motor. If they do not, match them. For adjustment, raise the stabilization parameter (H006) by degrees. If this increases motor hunting, lower it by degrees. When using the automatic torque boost (A041/A241 = 01), if motor hunting occurs in a low speed range, lower the manual torque boost voltage (A042/A242) and manual torque boost frequency (A043/A243). Other than this function, the following methods are suggested to reduce hunting: Lower the carrier frequency (b083) Lower the output voltage gain (A045)
Parameter No. A045 b083 H006/H206 Function name Output voltage gain Carrier frequency Stabilization parameter 20. to 100. 2.0 to 12.0 0. to 255. Data Description Unit: % (Lower this in motor hunting.) Unit: kHz (Lower this in motor hunting.) Adjust this in motor hunting.
4-76
4-2 Function Mode
Communication Function
Communication with external network control devices can be carried out from the communication connector of the 3G3JX, through the RS-485 complying ModBus-RTU protocol.
Communication Specifications
Item Transfer speed Synchronous system Description 4800/9600/19200 bps Asynchronous system Binary LSB first RS-485 8 bits (ModBus-RTU mode) No parity/Even/Odd 1 or 2 bits One-way startup via command from the host side Silent interval +0 to 1000[ms] 1:N (N = Max. 32) RJ45 modular jack Overrun/Framing/CRC-16/Horizontal parity Note Select using the Digital Operator. (ASCII mode not available) Select using the Digital Operator. Select using the Digital Operator. Set using the Digital Operator. Set using the Digital Operator.
Transfer code Transmission mode Complying interface
Functions
Data bit length Parity Stop bit length Startup method Wait time Connection Connector Error check
RS-485 Port Specifications and Connection

Details of each communication connector pin are shown below.
Pin No.: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Symbol SP SN Description Not used. Do not connect. Not used. Do not connect. Not used. Do not connect. Not used. Do not connect. Sent and received data: Positive side Sent and received data: Negative side Not used. Do not connect. Not used. Do not connect.
12345678
8k8k8k8
4-77
4-2 Function Mode
To connect the ModBus, connect each Inverter in parallel as below. Connect a termination resistor separately to avoid signal reflection, since this 3G3JX does not incorporate it. Choose a termination resistor according to the impedance characteristics of the cable to be used.
Termination resistor
ModBus network
Termination resistor
8k8k8k8
8k8k8k8
8k8k8k8
SP
SN
4
External controller (master)
Functions
ModBus Setting
Switching from the External OPE to ModuBus
1. Set the parameters using the Digital Operator in accordance with your communication environment. 2. Shut off the power. 3. Open the connector cover. 4. Insert the communication cable connected to the ModBus bus line. 5. Set the 485/OPE communications selector to "485". 6. Turn on the power and start ModBus communications.
Switching from ModuBus to the External OPE

1. Remove the ModBus communication line from the RJ45 connector of the Inverter while the Inverter is stopped. Wait 30 seconds to operate the Digital Operator. 2. Set parameter C070 to "02" (OPE) using the Digital Operator and save it. 3. Shut off the power. 4. Set the 485/OPE selector S7 to "OPE" and connect the external OPE to the RJ45 connector. 5. Turn on the power and start external OPE communications.
Operating area of the Inverter OPEMODBUS Enlarged view of the operating area
S7 485 S8 ON OPE OFF OPE OFF 485
MODBUSOPE Enlarged view of the operating area

S7 S8 ON
Note: Be sure to set parameter C070 in advance. Communication protocol will not be changed merely by switching S7.
4-78
4-2 Function Mode
ModBus-Related Parameter Settings

ModBus communication requires the following settings. Be sure to set the parameters shown below. In case the parameter settings are changed, ModBus communication will not start until the Inverter is turned ON again, even if "485" is selected with the 485/OPE selector. The parameters of C070s cannot be changed or set through ModBus communication. Set with the Digital Operator. ModBus Communication-Related Parameter List
Parameter No. Function name Data 00: Digital Operator (volume) 01: Terminal 02: Digital Operator (F001) 03: ModBus communication 10: Frequency operation result Default setting Unit
A001
Frequency reference selection
00
Functions
A002
01: Terminal RUN command selection 02: Digital Operator 03: ModBus communication 01: Output frequency monitor 02: Output current monitor 03: Rotation direction monitor Monitor display selection 04: PID feedback value monitor 05: Multi-function input monitor 06: Multi-function output monitor 07: Frequency conversion monitor Operator/ModBus selection Communication speed selection (Baud rate selection) Communication station No. selection Communication parity selection Communication stop bit selection 02: Digital Operator 03: ModBus 04: 4800 bps 05: 9600 bps 06: 19200 bps 1 to 32 00: No parity 01: Even 02: Odd 1: 1 bit 2: 2 bits 00: Trip 01: Trip after deceleration stop 02: Ignore 03: Free run 04: Deceleration stop 0.00 to 99.99 0 to 1000
02
b089
01
C070
02
C071
04
C072
1.
C074
00
C075
C076
02
C077 C078
Communication error timeout Communication wait time
0.00 0.
s ms
4-79
4-2 Function Mode ModBus Communication Protocol

Follow the procedures below in regard to communication between the external controller and the Inverter.
(1) External controller Inverter (2) Wait time (silent interval +C078) Time
(1): Frame to be sent from the external controller to the Inverter (Query) (2): Frame to be returned from the Inverter to the external controller (Response) The Inverter returns a response (Frame (2)) only after receiving a query (Frame (1)) and does not output a response positively. Each frame format (command) is shown below.
Functions
Message configuration: Query

Header (Silent interval) Slave address Function code Data Error check Trailer (Silent interval)
<Slave Address> Pre-set numbers ranging from 1 to 32 in each Inverter (slave). (Only the Inverter having the same slave address as the query takes in the query.) Broadcasting can be performed by setting the slave address to "0". Data call or loopback cannot be performed while broadcasting. <Data> Sends the function command. The 3G3JX corresponds with the following data formats used in the ModBus.
Data name Coil Holding register Description Binary data (1-bit long) that can be referred to or changed 16-bit long data that can be referred to or changed
<Function Code> Specifies a function for the Inverter to perform. The function codes available to the 3G3JX are shown on the next page.
4-80
4-2 Function Mode
Function code
Function code 01h 03h 05h 06h 08h 0Fh Function Coil status reading Holding register content reading Writing into the coil Writing into holding register Loopback test Writing into multiple coils Writing into multiple registers Maximum number of data bytes in 1 message 4 8 2 2 4 8 Maximum data number in 1 message 32 coils (in bits) 4 registers (in bytes) 1 coil (in bits) 1 registers (in bytes) 32 coils (in bits) 4 registers (in bytes)
10h
Functions
<Error Check> CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is used for the ModBus-RTU error check. The CRC code is 16-bit data generated for the block of random length data in the 8-bit unit. To generate the CRC code, the generation polynomial CRC-16 (X16+X15+X2+1) is used. CRC-16 Calculation Example
CRC-16 calculation CRC*1 Hi CRC =FFFFh
*1
Lo
CRC register (2 bytes)
Target data
Exists
CRC*1 = CRC*1 XOR target data
All target data completed
8-bit shift
Completed Bits left
Interchange Hi and Lo bytes of CRC*1
CRC = Shift CRC by 1 bit to the right
*1
*1
Overflow bit after shift 1
Completed
CRC*1 =CRC*1 XOR A001h

Shift by 1 byte against target data
<Header, Trailer (Silent interval)> Wait time between receiving the query from the master and the response by the Inverter. Be sure to provide the 3.5-character length for wait time. If the length does not reach 3.5 characters, the Inverter does not respond. The actual communication wait time is the total of the silent interval (3.5-character length) and C078 (communication wait time) setting.
4-81
4-2 Function Mode
Message configuration: Response <Total Communication Time> The time between receiving query and the response by the Inverter is the total of the silent interval (3.5-character length) and C078 (communication wait time) setting. When sending another query to the Inverter after receiving the response from the Inverter, be sure to provide the silent interval length (3.5-character length or more) at the minimum. <Normal Response> If the query is the loopback function code (08h), the Inverter sends back a response of the same content as the query. If the query contains a function code of writing into the holding register or coil (05h, 06h, 0Fh, 10h), the Inverter sends back the query as it is in response. If the query contains a function code of reading the holding register or coil (01h, 03h), the Inverter makes the slave address and function code the same as the query and attaches the read data to the query. <Abnormal Response>
Field Configuration Slave address Function code Exception code CRC-16
Functions
If an error (aside from a communication error) is found in the query content, the Inverter returns an exception response without performing any operation. To determine the cause of an error, check the function code of the response. The function code of the exception response is the value of the query function code with 80h added. Check the details of the error with the exception code.
Exception code Code 01h 02h 03h 21h Specified an unsupported function. Specified address does not exist. Specified data has an unacceptable format. Data is out of the Inverter's range for writing into the holding register. The Inverter does not allow this function. 22h Description
Attempted to change the register that cannot be changed during operation. Has issued the enter command during operation (UV). Has written into the register during trip (UV). Has written into the register used exclusively for reading.
Has written into the register (coil) used exclusively for reading.
23h
4-82
4-2 Function Mode
<No Response> The Inverter ignores a query and does not respond when: The broadcast is received. A communication error is detected in receiving a query. The query slave address does not correspond with the slave address set for the Inverter. The time interval between 2 pieces of data constituting the message is less than a 3.5-character length. Query data length is inappropriate. The reception interval in a frame exceeds the 1.5-character length. Note: Provide a timer in the master to monitor the response, and if no response is returned within the set time period, send the same query again.
Explanation of Each Function Code

<Coil status reading [01h]> Reads out the coil status (ON/OFF).
Functions
(Example) When reading multi-function input terminals from 1 to 5 of the Inverter with the slave address "8" Refer to the following table for the multi-function input terminal statuses. (Coils from 12 to 14 are OFF.)
Class Multi-function input terminals Coil No. Terminal status 1 7 ON 2 8 OFF Data 3 9 ON 4 10 OFF 5 11 OFF
Query No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field name Slave address *1 Function code Coil start number (MSB) Coil start number (LSB) Number of coils (MSB)*2 Number of coils (LSB)*2 CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB) Example (HEX) 08 01 00 06 00 05 1C 91
Response No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Field name Slave address Function code Number of data bytes Coil data
*3
Example (HEX) 08 01 01 05 92 17
CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB)
*1. Broadcasting cannot be performed. *2. When specifying the value for 0 or over 31 of the reading coils, the error code "03h" is sent. *3. Data is transferred by the number of data bytes.
4-83
4-2 Function Mode
The data received as the response shows the statuses of coils 7 to 14. The data received here, "05h = 00000101b", should be read with setting coil 7 as LSB as follows:
Item Coil No. Coil status 14 OFF 13 OFF 12 OFF 11 OFF Data 10 OFF 9 ON 8 OFF 7 ON
If the reading coil exceeds the defined coil range in the final coil data, such coil data is regarded as "0" and returned. Refer to "<Exception Response>" (4-89) if the coil status reading command has not been performed normally. <Reading the Holding Register Content [03h]> Reads the specified number of consecutive holding register contents from the specified holding register addresses. (Example) Reads the latest trip information (frequency, current, voltage at trip) from the Inverter with the slave address "1". Refer to the trip status as follows:
3G3JX command Register No. Trip status D081 (Factor) 0012h Overcurrent (E03) D081 (Frequency) 0014h 9.9 Hz D081 (Output current) 0016h 3.0 A D081 (DC bus V DC) 0017h 284 V
Functions
4-84
4-2 Function Mode
Query No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Field name Slave address*1 Function code Register start address *3 (MSB) Register start address *3 (LSB) Number of holding registers (MSB) Number of holding registers (LSB) CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB) Example (Hex) 01 03 00 11 00 06 95 CD
Response No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Field name Slave address Function code Number of data bytes*2 Register data 1 (MSB) Register data 1 (LSB) Register data 2 (MSB) Register data 2 (LSB) Register data 3 (MSB) Register data 3 (LSB) Register data 4 (MSB) Register data 4 (LSB) Register data 5 (MSB) Register data 5 (LSB) Register data 6 (MSB) Register data 6 (LSB) CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB) Example (Hex) 01 03 0C 00 03 00 00 00 63 00 00 00 1E 01 1C AF 6D
Functions
7 8
*1. Broadcasting cannot be performed. *2. Data is transferred by the number of data bytes. In this example, 12 ("0Ch") bytes are used since 6 pieces of holding register data are returned. *3. Note that the holding register start address is "0011h", which is smaller by 1 than the register number "0012h". Read the data received in the response, as follows:
Response buffer Holding register start number Response data Trip data Response buffer Holding register start number Response data Trip data 12+3 (MSB) 00h Not used 12+0 (MSB) 003h Trip factor (E03) 10-11 12+3 (LSB) 00h 12+4 (MSB) 001Eh Output current (3.0 A) 4-5 12+0 (LSB) 12+1 (MSB) 00h Not used 12-13 12+4 (LSB) 12+5 (MSB) 001Ch DC bus V DC (284V) 6-7 12+1 (LSB) 00h 12+2 (MSB) 0063h Frequency (9.9 Hz) 14-15 12+5 (LSB) 8-9 12+2 (LSB)
4-85
4-2 Function Mode
Refer to "<Exception Response>" (4-89) if the holding register content reading command has not been performed normally. <Writing Into the Coil [05h]> Writes into one coil. The coil status change is shown in the following table.
Coil status Data Change data (MSB) Change data (LSB) OFF ON FFh 00h ON OFF 00h 00h
(Example) Issues the RUN command to the Inverter with the slave address "8". For running, "03" must be set to "A002". The coil number of the RUN command is "1".
Query No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field name Slave address*1 Function code Coil address*2 (MSB) Example (Hex) 08 05 00 00 FF 00 8C A3 Response No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field name Slave address Function code Coil address*2 (MSB) Example (Hex) 08 05 00 00 FF 00 8C A3
Functions
Coil address*2 (LSB) Change data (MSB) Change data (LSB) CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB)
Coil address*2 (LSB) Change data (MSB) Change data (LSB) CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB)
*1. There is no response for broadcasting. *2. Note that the coil start address is "0", which is smaller by 1 than the coil number "1". The coil addresses for coil numbers from "1 to 31" are "0 to 30". Refer to "<Exception Response>" (4-89) if writing into the coil cannot be performed normally. <Writing into the holding register [06h]> Writes data into the specified holding register. (Example) Write "50 Hz" into the Inverter with slave address "8" as multi-step speed reference 0 (A020). The data resolution of the holding register "1029h" of multi-step speed reference 0 (A020) is 0.1 Hz. To set 50 Hz, set the change data to "500 (01F4h)".
4-86
4-2 Function Mode
Query No. 1 2 3 4 5 Field name Slave address*1 Function code Register address (MSB)
*2
Response Example (Hex) 08 06 10 28 01 F4 0D 8C No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field name Slave address Function code Register address (MSB)
*2
Example (Hex) 08 06 10 28 01 F4 0D 8C
Register address*2 (LSB) Change data (MSB) Change data (LSB) CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB)
Register address*2 (LSB) Change data (MSB) Change data (LSB) CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB)
6 7
Functions
*1. There is no response for broadcasting. *2. Note that the holding register start address is "1028h", which is smaller by 1 than the register number "1029h". Refer to "<Exception Response>" (4-89) if writing into the holding register cannot be performed normally. <Loopback Test [08h]> Used to check the communications between master and slave. A random value can be used for test data. (Example) Loopback test to the Inverter with the slave address "1"
Query No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field name Slave address * Function code Test sub code (MSB) Test sub code (LSB) Data (MSB) Data (LSB) CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB) Example (HEX) 01 08 00 00 Random Random CRC CRC
Response No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field name Slave address Function code Test sub code (MSB) Test sub code (LSB) Data Data CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB) Example (HEX) 01 08 00 00 Random Random CRC CRC
* Broadcasting cannot be performed. The test sub code corresponds only with the query data echo (00h, 00h), not any other command.
4-87
4-2 Function Mode
<Writing Into Multiple Coils [0Fh]> Rewrites consecutive multiple coils. (Example) Change the status of multi-function input terminals [S1] to [S5] of the Inverter with the slave address "8". Refer to the following table for the status of multi-function input terminals [S1] to [S5].
Multi-function input terminals Coil No. Terminal status [S1] 7 ON [S2] 8 ON [S3] 9 ON [S4] 10 OFF [S5] 11 ON
4
Query No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Field name Slave address *1 Function code Coil start address (MSB) *3 Coil start address (LSB) *3 Number of coils (MSB) Number of coils (LSB) Number of bytes *2 Change data (MSB) Change data (LSB) CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB) Example (HEX) 08 0F 00 06 00 05 02 17 00 83 EA Response No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field name Slave address Function code Coil start address (MSB) *3 Coil start address (LSB) *3 Number of coils (MSB) Number of coils (LSB) CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB) Example (HEX) 08 0F 00 06 00 05 75 50
Functions
*1. There is no response for broadcasting. *2. Since the change data comprises both MSB and LSB as a set, make the byte to be an even number by adding 1, even if the byte which actually needs to be changed is an odd number. *3. Note that the coil start address is "6", which is smaller by 1 than the coil number "7". The coil addresses for coil numbers from "1 to 31" are "0 to 30".
Refer to "<Exception Response>" (4-89) if writing into multiple coils cannot be performed normally. <Writing into multiple holding registers [10h]> Writes into consecutive multiple holding registers. (Example) Set "3000 seconds" to acceleration time 1 (F002) for the Inverter with the slave address "8". The data resolution of the holding register "1024h, 1015h" of acceleration time 1 (F002) is 0.01 seconds. To set 3000 seconds, set change data to "300000 (000493E0h)".
4-88
4-2 Function Mode
Query No. 1 2 3 4 5 Field name Slave address *1 Function code Start address (MSB) Start address (LSB)
*3
Response Example (HEX) 08 10 10 13 00 02 04 00 04 93 E0 7D 53 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field name Slave address Function code Start address (MSB) Start address (LSB) Number of holding registers (MSB) Number of holding registers (LSB) CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB) Example (HEX) 08 10 10 13 00 02 B4 54
*3
Number of holding registers (MSB) Number of holding registers (LSB) Number of bytes *2 Change data 1 (MSB) Change data 1 (LSB) Change data 2 (MSB) Change data 2 (LSB) CRC-16 (MSB) CRC-16 (LSB)
6 7
Functions
8 9 10 11 12 13
*1. There is no response for broadcasting. *2. Specify the number of bytes to be changed, not the number of holding registers. *3. Note that the holding register start address is "1013h", which is smaller by 1 than the register number "1014h". Refer to "<Exception Response>" below if writing into the multiple holding registers cannot be performed normally. <Exception Response> The master requires a response for a query except for broadcasting. Though the Inverter should return a response corresponding with the query, it returns an exception response if the query has an error. The exception response has a field configuration shown in the following table.
Field Configuration Slave address Function code Exception code CRC-16
The detailed field configuration is shown on the next page. The function code of the exception response is the value of the query function code with 80h added. The exception code shows the cause of exception response.
4-89
4-2 Function Mode
Function code Query 01h 03h 05h 06h 0Fh 10h Exception response 81h 83h 85h 86h 8Fh 90h
Exception code Code 01h 02h 03h 21h Description Specified an unsupported function. Specified address does not exist. Specified data has an unacceptable format. Data is out of the Inverter's range for writing into the holding register. The Inverter does not allow this function. Attempted to change the register which cannot be changed during operation. Has issued the enter command during operation (UV). Has written into the register during trip (UV). Has written into the register used exclusively for reading. Has written into the register (coil) used exclusively for reading.
22h
Functions
23h
To Save the Change to the Holding Register (enter command)

Even if using the command to write into the holding register (06h) or into the consecutive holding registers (10h), no change can be saved in the EEPROM memory element of the Inverter. If the Inverter power shuts off without saving any changes, the holding register returns to the status before the changes were made. To save the holding register changes in the Inverter's EEPROM memory element, the "enter command" must be issued according to the following procedure. To issue the enter command Write into all memory write (holding register number 0900h) using the writing command into the holding register (06h). In this case, a random value can be written into the holding register (0900h).
Notes: The enter command needs considerable time. Monitor the data writing signal (coil number 001Ah) to check whether the data is being written. Since the Inverter's EEPROM memory element has a limit on the number of rewrites (approx. 100,000 times), the Inverter life may be shortened if enter commands are frequently used.
4-90
4-2 Function Mode Register Number List

R/W in the list shows whether the coil or holding register accepts reading and/or writing. R: Read only Coil Number List
Coil No. 0000h 0001h Not used RUN commands Rotation direction command External Trip (EXT) Trip reset (RS) Not used Not used Multi-function input 1 Multi-function input 2 Multi-function input 3 Multi-function input 4 Multi-function input 5 Not used Operation status Rotation direction Inverter ready Not used Not used Not used Alarm signal R R R R 1: During trip 0: Normal 1: RUN 0: Stop (Interlocked with d003) 1: Reverse 0: Forward (Interlocked with d003) 1: Ready 0: Not ready Item R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1: ON 0: OFF *1 1: ON 0: OFF *1 1: ON 0: OFF *1 1: ON 0: OFF *1 1: ON 0: OFF *1 1: RUN 0: Stop (Enabled when A002 = 03) 1: Reverse 0: Forward (Enabled when A002 = 03) 1: Trip 1: Reset Description
R/W: Read and write enabled
0002h 0003h 0004h
Functions
0005h 0006h 0007h 0008h 0009h 000Ah 000Bh 000Dh 000Eh 000Fh 0010h 0011h 0012h 0013h 0014h
*1. When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned ON, these settings are ON. The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi-function input. If the master cannot reset the coil ON status due to communication disconnection, turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF in order to turn OFF the coil. *2. The content of a communications error is retained until a fault reset is input. (Available to reset during operation)
4-91
4-2 Function Mode
Coil No. 0015h 0016h 0017h 0018h 0019h 001Ah 001Bh 001Ch 001Dh 001Eh 001Fh
Item Excessive PID deviation signal Overload warning signal Frequency arrival signal (Over set frequency) Frequency arrival signal (At a constant speed) Signal during RUN Data writing CRC error Overrun error Framing error Parity error Check sum error
R/W R R R R R R R R R R R 1: Error 0: No error *2 1: Writing 0: Normal 1: ON 0: OFF
Description
Functions
*1. When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned ON, these settings are ON. The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi-function input. If the master cannot reset the coil ON status due to communication disconnection, turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF in order to turn OFF the coil. *2. The content of a communications error is retained until a fault reset is input. (Available to reset during operation) Holding Register Number List
Register No. 0002h Function name Frequency reference (Enable when A001 = 03) Parameter No. R/W Function R/W Monitor or data range 0 to 4000 00: Default 01: (Reserved) 02: Stop 03: Run 04: Free-run stop (FRS) 05: Jogging 06: DC injection braking 07: Retry 08: Trip 09: Undervoltage 0 to 1000 0 to 4000 0 to 2000 00: Stop 01: Forward 02: Reverse Resolution 0.1 [Hz]
0003h
Inverter status
0005h 1002h 1003h 1004h
PID feedback (Enable when A076 = 02) Output frequency monitor Output current monitor Rotation direction monitor
d001 d002 d003 d004 (MSB)
R/W R R R
0.1 [%] 0.1 [Hz] 0.1 [%]
1005h PID feedback value monitor (A075 PID scale) 1006h
R d004 (LSB)
0 to 999900
0.01 [%]
4-92
4-2 Function Mode
Register No. 1007h
Function name
Parameter No. d005
R/W Function R
Monitor or data range 0 to 63 Multi-function input status, Bit 0 = [1] to Bit 4 = [5] 0 to 7 Multi-function output status, Bit 0 = [P1] Bit 1 = Not used. Bit 2 = [MA]
Resolution
1008h
d006
1009h
4
100Ah 100Ch
d007 (MSB) R d007 (LSB) d013 d016 (MSB) R 0 to 20000 0.01 [%] 0 to 3996000 0.01
Output voltage monitor
Functions
100Eh Total RUN time 100Fh 1010h Power ON time monitor 1011h 116Ah 0011h 116Ch 116Dh 0012h 0014h 0016h 0017h Fault monitor 1 0018h 0019h 001Ah 001Bh 001Ch 001Eh 0020h 0021h Fault monitor 2 0022h 0023h 0024h 0025h Fin temperature monitor Fault frequency monitor DC voltage monitor Electronic thermal monitor
R d016 (LSB) d017 (MSB) R d017 (LSB) d018 d080 d102 d104 R R R R R R R R d081 R R R R R R R R d082 R R R R
0 to 999999
1 [h]
0 to 999999
1 [h]
0 to 2000 0 to 65535 0 to 9999 0 to 1000 Trip monitor 1: Factor code Trip monitor 1: Frequency Trip monitor 1: Current Trip monitor 1: Voltage Trip monitor 1: Run time (MSB)
0.1 [C] 0.1 [V] 0.1 [%] 0.1 [Hz] 0.1 [A] 1. [V] 1. [h]
Trip monitor 1: Run time (LSB) Trip monitor 1: ON time (MSB) 1. [h] Trip monitor 1: ON time (LSB) Trip monitor 2: Factor code Trip monitor 2: Frequency Trip monitor 2: Current Trip monitor 2: Voltage Trip monitor 2: Run time (MSB) 1. [h] Trip monitor 2: Run time (LSB) Trip monitor 2: ON time (MSB) 1. [h] Trip monitor 2: ON time (LSB) 0.1 [Hz] 0.1 [A] 1. [V]
4-93
4-2 Function Mode
Register No. 0026h 0028h 002Ah 002Bh
Function name
Parameter No.
R/W Function R R R R
Monitor or data range Trip monitor 3: Factor code Trip monitor 3: Frequency Trip monitor 3: Current Trip monitor 3: Voltage Trip monitor 3: Run time (MSB)
Resolution 0.1 [Hz] 0.1 [A] 1. [V] 1. [h]
Fault monitor 3 002Ch 002Dh 002Eh 002Fh 1014h Acceleration time 1 1015h 1501h 2nd acceleration time 1 1502h 1016h Deceleration time 1 1017h 1503h 2nd deceleration time 1 1504h 1018h Operator rotation direction selection
d083 R R R R F002 (MSB) F002 (LSB) F202 (MSB) F202 (LSB) F003 (MSB) F003 (LSB) F203 (MSB) F203 (LSB) F004 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Trip monitor 3: Run time (LSB) Trip monitor 3: ON time (MSB) 1. [h] Trip monitor 3: ON time (LSB) 1 to 300000 The second decimal place is ignored when the value is over 10000 (100.0 seconds). 1 to 300000 The second decimal place is ignored when the value is over 10000 (100.0 seconds). 1 to 300000 The second decimal place is ignored when the value is over 10000 (100.0 seconds). 1 to 300000 The second decimal place is ignored when the value is over 10000 (100.0 seconds). 0: Forward 1: Reverse 00: Digital Operator (volume) 01: Terminal 02: Digital Operator (F001) 03: ModBus communication 10: Frequency operation result 01: Terminal 02: Digital Operator 03: ModBus communication 30. to maximum frequency A004 30. to maximum frequency A204 30 to 400 30 to 400 02: Switches between FV/VR via terminal AT 03: Switches between FI/VR via terminal AT 04: Terminal FV 05: Terminal FI 1. [Hz] 1. [Hz] 1. [Hz] 1. [Hz]
0.01 [s]
Functions
0.01 [s]
0.01 [s]
0.01 [s]
1019h
Frequency reference selection
A001
R/W
101Ah 101Bh 150Ch 101Ch 150Dh
RUN command selection Base frequency 2nd base frequency Maximum frequency 2nd maximum frequency
A002 A003 A203 A004 A204
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
101Dh
FV/FI selection
A005
R/W
4-94
4-2 Function Mode
Register No. 1020h 1022h 1023h 1024h 1025h 1026h
Function name FV start frequency FV end frequency FV start ratio FV end ratio FV start selection FV, FI sampling Multi-step speed reference 0 2nd multi-step speed reference 0 Multi-step speed reference 1 Multi-step speed reference 2 Multi-step speed reference 3 Multi-step speed reference 4 Multi-step speed reference 5 Multi-step speed reference 6 Multi-step speed reference 7 Multi-step speed reference 8 Multi-step speed reference 9 Multi-step speed reference 10 Multi-step speed reference 11 Multi-step speed reference 12 Multi-step speed reference 13 Multi-step speed reference 14 Multi-step speed reference 15 Jogging frequency Jogging stop selection Torque boost selection 2nd torque boost selection Manual torque boost voltage 2nd manual torque boost voltage
Parameter No. A011 A012 A013 A014 A015 A016 A020 A220 A021 A022 A023 A024 A025 A026 A027 A028 A029 A030 A031 A032 A033 A034 A035 A038 A039 A041 A241 A042 A242
R/W Function R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 to 200 R/W 0 to 999
Monitor or data range 0 to 4000 0 to 4000 0 to 100 0 to 100 00: Start frequency A011 01: 0 Hz 1 to 17 0.0/Starting frequency to 4000 0.0/Starting frequency to 4000
Resolution 0.1 [Hz] 0.1 [Hz] 1 [%] 1 [%] 0.1 [Hz] 0.1 [Hz]
1029h 150Fh 102Bh
Functions
102Dh 102Fh 1031h 1033h 1035h 1037h 1039h 103Bh 103Dh 103Fh 1041h 1043h 1045h 1047h 1048h 1049h 104Ah 1510h 104Bh 1511h
0.0/Starting frequency to 4000
0.1 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
00: Free-run stop 01: Deceleration stop 02: DC injection braking stop 00: Manual torque boost only 01: Simple torque boost
0.1 [%]
4-95
4-2 Function Mode
Register No. 104Ch 1512h 104Dh 1513h 104Eh 1514h 1051h
Function name Manual torque boost frequency 2nd manual torque boost frequency V/f characteristics selection 2nd V/f characteristics selection Output voltage gain 2nd output voltage gain DC injection braking selection DC injection braking frequency DC injection braking delay time DC injection braking power DC injection braking time DC injection braking method selection Frequency upper limit
Parameter No. A043 A243 A044 A244 A045 A245 A051
R/W Function R/W 0 to 500 R/W R/W R/W R/W
Monitor or data range
Resolution
0.1 [%]
00: VC 01: 1.7th power of VP 06: Special VP 20 to 100
1. [%]
R/W R/W 00: Disabled 01: Enabled during stop 02: Output frequency<A052 DB 0 to 600 0 to 50 0 to 100 0 to 600 00: Edge operation 01: Level operation 0.0/Frequency lower limit : A062 x 10 to Maximum frequency : A004 x 10 0.0/2nd frequency lower limit : A262 x 10 to 2nd max. frequency : A204 x 10 0.0/Starting frequency : b082 10 to Frequency upper limit : A061 10 0.0/Starting frequency : b082 x 10 to 2nd frequency upper limit : A261x10 0 to 4000
Functions
1052h 1053h 1054h 1055h 1056h
A052 A053 A054 A055 A056
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
0.1 [Hz] 0.1 [s] 1. [%] 0.1 [s]
105Ah
A061
R/W
0.1 [Hz]
1517h
2nd frequency upper limit
A261
R/W
0.1 [Hz]
105Bh
Frequency lower limit
A062
R/W
0.1 [Hz]
1518h 105Dh 1060h 1063h 105Eh 1061h 1064h 1068h 1069h 106Ah 106Bh 106Ch
2nd frequency lower limit Jump frequency 1 Jump frequency 2 Jump frequency 3 Jump frequency width 1 Jump frequency width 2 Jump frequency width 3 PID selection PID P gain PID I gain PID D gain PID scale
A262 A063, A065, A067 A064, A066, A068 A071 A072 A073 A074 A075
R/W
0.1 [Hz]
R/W
0.1 [Hz]
R/W
0 to 100 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 2 to 50 0 to 1500 0 to 1000 1 to 9999
0.1 [Hz]
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
0.1 0.1 [s] 0.1 [s] 0.01
4-96
4-2 Function Mode
Register No.
Function name
Parameter No.
R/W Function
Monitor or data range 00: Feedback (FI) 01: Feedback (FV) 02: External communication 10: Operation function output 00: OFF (Deviation = Target value Feedback value) 01: ON (Deviation = Feedback value Target value) 0 to 1000 00: Always ON 01: Always OFF 02: OFF during deceleration 200-V class 0: 200 1: 215 2: 220 3: 230 4: 240 400-V class 0: 380 1: 400 2: 415 3: 440 4: 460 5: 480 00: Normal operation 01: Energy-saving operation 0 to 1000 1 to 300000 The second decimal place is ignored when the value is over 10000 (100.0 seconds). 1 to 300000 The second decimal place is ignored when the value is over 10000 (100.0 seconds). 1 to 300000 The second decimal place is ignored when the value is over 10000 (100.0 seconds). 1 to 300000 The second decimal place is ignored when the value is over 10000 (100.0 seconds).
Resolution
106Dh
PID feedback selection
A076
R/W
106Eh
Reverse PID function
A077
R/W
106Fh 1070h
PID output limit function AVR selection
A078 A081
R/W R/W
0.1 [%]
Functions
1071h
AVR voltage selection
A082
R/W
1072h 1073h 1074h
RUN mode selection Energy-saving response/ accuracy adjustment
A085 A086 A092 (MSB)
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
0.1 [%]
Acceleration time 2 1075h 1519h 2nd acceleration time 2 151Ah 1076h Deceleration time 2 1077h 151Bh 2nd deceleration time 2 151Ch A293 (LSB) A093 (LSB) A293 (MSB) A292 (LSB) A093 (MSB) A092 (LSB) A292 (MSB)
0.01 [s]
0.01 [s]
0.01 [s]
0.01 [s]
4-97
4-2 Function Mode
Register No. 1078h 151Dh 107Ah 151Fh 107Ch 1521h 107Dh 107Eh 1080h 1082h 1083h 1084h 1085h 108Eh 108Fh
Function name 2-step acceleration/ deceleration selection 2nd 2-step acceleration/ deceleration selection 2-step acceleration frequency 2nd 2-step acceleration frequency 2-step deceleration frequency *2nd 2-step deceleration frequency Acceleration pattern selection Deceleration pattern selection FI start frequency FI end frequency FI start ratio FI end ratio FI start selection Operation frequency input A setting Operation frequency input B setting Operator selection Frequency addition amount
Parameter No. A094 A294 A095 A295 A096 A296 A097 A098 A101 A102 A103 A104 A105 A141 A142
R/W Function R/W
Resolution
00: Switched via terminal 2CH 01: Switched by setting R/W R/W 0 to 4000 R/W R/W 0 to 4000 R/W
0.1 [Hz]
4
0.1 [Hz]
Functions
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
00: Line 01: S-shape curve 00: Line 01: S-shape curve 0 to 4000 0 to 4000 0 to 100 0 to 100 00: Start frequency A101 01: 0 Hz 00: Digital Operator (F001) 01: Digital Operator (volume) 02: Input FV 03: Input FI 04: RS485 communications 00: Addition (A + B) 01: Subtraction (A B) 02: Multiplication (A B) 0 to 4000 00: Adds the A145 value to the output frequency 01: Subtract A145 value from output frequency 0 to 4000 0 to 4000 0 to 100 0 to 100 0, 1 00: Alarm 01: 0 Hz start 02: Frequency matching restart 03: Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop
0.1 [Hz] 0.1 [Hz] 1. [%] 1. [%]
1090h 1091h
A143 A145
R/W R/W
0.1 [Hz]
1093h
A146
R/W
1095h 1097h 1098h 1099h 109Ah
VR start frequency VR end frequency VR start ratio VR end ratio VR start selection
A151 A152 A153 A154 A155
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
0.1 [Hz] 0.1 [Hz] 1. [%] 1. [%] -
10A5h
Retry selection
b001
R/W
4-98
4-2 Function Mode
Register No. 10A6h 10A7h 10A8h
Function name Allowable momentary power interruption time Retry wait time Momentary power interruption/undervoltage trip during stop selection Momentary power interruption retry time selection Starting frequency at frequency pull-in restart Electronic thermal level 2nd electronic thermal level Electronic thermal characteristics selection 2nd electronic thermal characteristics selection Overload limit selection 2nd overload limit selection Overload limit level 2nd overload limit level Overload limit parameter 2nd overload limit parameter Overload limit source selection 2nd overload limit source selection Deceleration rate constant at frequency pull-in restart Frequency pull-in restart level
Parameter No. b002 b003 b004
R/W Function R/W R/W R/W 3 to 250
Resolution 0.1 [s] 0.1 [s]
3 to 1000 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 00: 16 times 01: No limit 00: Frequency at interruption 01: Max. frequency 02: Set frequency 2000 to 10000 Set the rated current to 10000 00: Reduced torque characteristics 1 01: Constant torque characteristics 02: Reduced torque characteristics 2 00: Disabled 01: Enabled in acceleration/constant speed operation 02: Enabled in constant speed operation 2000 to 15000 Set the rated current to 10000 1 to 300
10A9h
b005
R/W
4
1170h 10ADh 1527h 10AEh 1528h 10B5h 1529h 10B6h 152Ah 10B7h 152Bh 10BBh 152Ch 1171h 1172h
b011 b012 b212 b013 b213 b021 b221 b022 b222 b023 b223 b028 b228 b029 b030
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Functions
0.01 [%]
0.01 [%]
0.1 [s] 0.1 [s] 0.01 [%]
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 00: Set values in b022 01: Input FV terminal 00: Set values in b222 01: Input FV terminal 1 to 30000 200 to 20000
4-99
4-2 Function Mode
Register No.
Function name
Parameter No.
R/W Function
Monitor or data range 00: Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON. 01: Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON. 02: Data other than b031 cannot be changed. 03: Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed. 10: Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed. 00: Disabled 01: Enabled (Stop) 02: Enabled (Restart) 0 to 10000
Resolution
10BCh
Soft lock selection
b031
R/W
10C9h
Selection of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Starting voltage of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Stop deceleration level of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Deceleration time of nonstop function at momentary power interruption Deceleration starting width of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Overvoltage protection proportional gain during deceleration Overvoltage protection integral time during deceleration AM adjustment Starting frequency Carrier frequency
Functions
b050
R/W
10CAh
b051
R/W
0.1 [V]
10CBh
b052
R/W
0 to 10000
0.1 [V]
10CCh
b053
R/W
1 to 30000
0.1 [s]
10CEh
b054
R/W
0 to 100
0.1 [Hz]
1173h
b055
R/W
2 to 50
0.1
1174h 10CFh 10D1h 10D2h
b056 b080 b082 b083
R/W R/W R/W R/W
0 to 1500 0 to 255 5 to 99 20 to 120 00: Clears the trip monitor 01: Initializes data 02: Clears the trip monitor and initializes data 00: Fixed *Do not change. 1 to 999
0.1 [s] 0.1 [Hz] 0.1 [kHz]
10D3h
Initialization selection
b084
R/W
10D4h 10D5h
Initialization parameter selection Frequency conversion coefficient
b085 b086
R/W R/W
0.1
4-100
4-2 Function Mode
Register No. 10D6h 10D7h
Function name STOP key selection Free-run stop selection
R/W Function R/W R/W
Monitor or data range 00: Enabled 01: Disabled 00: 0 Hz start 01: Frequency pull-in restart 01: Output frequency monitor 02: Output current monitor 03: Rotation direction monitor 04: PID feedback value monitor 05: Multi-function input monitor 06: Multi-function output monitor 07: Frequency conversion monitor 00: DecelerationStop 01: Free-run stop 00: Always ON 01: ON during RUN 02: Depends on the fin temperature 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 200-V class: 330 to 395, 400-V class: 660 to 790 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 200-V class: 330. to 395. 400-V class: 660. to 790. 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 00: RDY disabled 01: RDY enabled
Resolution
10D8h
b089
R/W
4
10DAh Stop selection b091 R/W
1. [V]
Functions
10DBh
Cooling fan control Overvoltage LAD stop function Overvoltage LAD stop function level setting Overvoltage protection function selection during deceleration Overvoltage protection level setting during deceleration Overcurrent suppression function Automatic carrier reduction Ready function selection
b092
R/W
10F5h 10F6h
b130 b131
R/W R/W
1176h
b133
R/W
1177h 10F7h 10F8h 10F9h
b134 b140 b150 b151
R/W R/W R/W R/W
1. [V]
4-101
4-2 Function Mode
Register No. 1103h 1532h 1104h 1533h 1105h 1534h 1106h 1535h 1107h 1536h 110Bh 110Ch 110Dh 110Eh 110Fh 1114h
Function name Multi-function input 1 selection 2nd multi-function input 1 selection Multi-function input 2 selection 2nd multi-function input 2 selection Multi-function input 3 selection 2nd multi-function input 3 selection Multi-function input 4 selection 2nd multi-function input 4 selection Multi-function input 5 selection 2nd multi-function input 5 selection Multi-function input 1 operation selection Multi-function input 2 operation selection Multi-function input 3 operation selection Multi-function input 4 operation selection Multi-function input 5 operation selection Multi-function output terminal P1 selection Relay output (MA, MB) function selection AM selection Multi-function output terminal P1 contact selection Relay output (MA, MB) contact selection Light load signal output mode Light load detection level
Parameter No. C001 C201 C002 C202 C003 C203 C004 C204 C005 C205 C011 C012 C013 C014 C015 C021
R/W Function R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 00: NO 01: NC
Resolution
00: FW/01: RV/02: CF1/03: CF2/04: CF3/05: CF4/06: JG/07: DB/08: SET/09: 2CH/11: FRS/12: EXT/13: USP/15: SFT/ 16: AT/18: RS/19: PTC terminal 5 only/ 20: STA/21: STP/22: F/R/23: PID/24: PIDC/27: UP/28: DWN/29: UDC/31: OPE/50: ADD/51: F-TM/52: RDY/53: SP-SET/64: EMR(automatically allocated to terminal 3 if enabled)/255: NO
Functions
1119h 111Bh 111Dh 1122h
C026 C028 C031 C036
R/W R/W R/W R/W
00: RUN/01: FA1/02: FA2/03: OL/04: OD/05: AL/06: Dc/07: FBV/08: NDc/09: LOG/10: ODc(Do not use.)/43: LOC 00: F (Output frequency) 01: A (Output current) 00: NO 01: NC 00: NO 01: NC 00: Enabled during acceleration/ deceleration/constant speed 01: Enabled only during constant speed 0 to 20000 Set to10000 at rated current
1178h
C038
R/W
1179h
C039
R/W
0.01 [%]
4-102
4-2 Function Mode
Register No. 1124h 153Ah 1126h 1128h 1129h
Function name Overload warning level 2nd overload warning level Arrival frequency during acceleration Arrival frequency during deceleration PID deviation excessive level PID FB upper limit PID FB lower limit Operator/ModBus selection Communication speed selection (Baud rate selection) Communication station No. selection Communication parity selection Communication stop bit selection Communication error selection Communication error timeout Communication wait time FV adjustment FI adjustment AM offset adjustment Not used UP/DWN selection
Parameter No. C041 C241 C042 C043 C044 C052 C053 C070 C071
R/W Function R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Monitor or data range 0 to 20000 Set to10000 at rated current 0 to 4000 0 to 4000 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 0 to 1000
Resolution
0.01 [%]
0.1 [Hz] 0.1 [Hz] 0.1 [%] 0.1 [%] 0.1 [%]
112Eh 112Fh 1137h
Functions
1138h
1139h 113Bh 113Ch 113Dh 113Eh 113Fh 1141h 1142h 1145h 1149h
C072 C074 C075 C076 C077 C078 C081 C082 C086 C091 C101
Do not change through ModBus communication. For setting, refer to "ModBus Setting" (4-78).
0 to 2000 0 to 2000 0 to 100 Do not change. 00: OFF/01: ON 00: Trip reset at power-on 01: Trip reset when the power is OFF 02: Enabled only during trip (Reset when the power is ON.)
0.1 [%] 0.1 [%] 0.1 [V]
114Ah
Reset selection
C102
R/W
1150h
Logic operation function A input Logic operation function B input Logic operator selection
C141
R/W
00: RUN/01: FA1/02: FA2/03: OL/04: OD/05: AL/06: Dc/07: FBV/08: NDc/10: ODc(Do not use.)/43: LOC
1151h 1152h
C142 C143
R/W R/W 00: AND/01: OR/02: XOR
4-103
4-2 Function Mode
Register No. 1153h 1154h 1157h 1158h 1165h
Function name Output terminal P1 ON delay Output terminal P1 OFF delay Relay output ON delay Relay output OFF delay Motor capacity selection
Parameter No. C144 C145 C148 C149 H003
R/W Function R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Monitor or data range 0 to 1000 0 to 1000
Resolution
0.1 [s] 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 00: 0.2/02: 0.4/04: 0.75/ 06: 1.5/07: 2.2/09: 3.7/ 11: 5.5/12: 7.5 00: 0.2/02: 0.4/04: 0.75/ 06: 1.5/07: 2.2/09: 3.7/ 11: 5.5/12: 7.5 2/4/6/8 2/4/6/8 0. to 255. 0. to 255. Indefinite value
1541h 1166h 1542h 1168h 1544h 0900h
2nd motor capacity selection Motor pole number selection 2nd motor pole number selection Stabilization parameter 2nd stabilization parameter Enter command
H203 H004 H204 H006 H206
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W W
1 [pole]
Functions
1 [pole] 1. [%] 1. [%]
4-104
4-2 Function Mode
Functions
4-105
Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations

5-1 Special Display List ......................................... 5-1 5-2 Troubleshooting............................................... 5-5
5-1 Special Display List
5Maintenance Operations

Error Code List
Name Description Constant speed Overcurrent trip If the motor is restrained, or rapidly accelerated or decelerated, a large current flows through the Inverter, which may result in breakdown. To avoid this, an overcurrent protection circuit works to shut off the Inverter output. Deceleration Acceleration Others If an Inverter output current is detected and the motor is overloaded, an electronic thermal inside the Inverter operates to shut off the Inverter output. Display on Digital Operator
ek_k0k1 ek_k0k2 ek_k0k3 ek_k0k4
Overload trip
After a trip occurs, normal operation is restored in 10 seconds by resetting the Inverter.
Overvoltage trip If the incoming voltage and regenerative energy from the motor are too high, a protection circuit works to shut off the Inverter output when the voltage on the converter exceeds the specified level. Shuts off the output if an error occurs in the EEPROM built into the Inverter due to external noise and abnormal temperature rise. EEPROM error
ek_k0k5
ek_k0k7
Check the set data again if the ek_k0k8 error occurs. If the power is shut off during data initialization, an EEPROM error ek_k0k8 may occur when the power is next turned on. Shut off the power after completing data initialization.
Shuts off the output if the incoming voltage drops below the specified level, causing the control circuit not to work properly during a momentary power interruption. Shuts off the output if the internal CPU has malfunctioned.
ek_k0k8
Undervoltage trip
ek_k0k9
CPU error
If the multi-function output terminal (relay terminal) is set to 05 (alarm), the signal may not be output during the CPU error ek_k1k1 . In this case, no data is stored in the trip monitor. The same thing could happen if AL (05) is allocated to the relay output terminal. Again, no data is stored.
If an error occurs in the external equipment or devices, the Inverter receives the signal, and the output is shut off. (Available with the external trip function selected) Appears if the Inverter is turned on with the RUN command being input. (Available with the USP function selected)
ek_k1k1
External trip
ek_k1k2
USP trip
If an undervoltage trip ek_k0k9 occurs with the USP terminal turned ON, a USP trip ek_k1k3 occurs after a trip reset. Reset again to release the trip.
ek_k1k3
5-1
Name
Description Shuts off the output if a ground fault between the Inverter output unit and the motor is detected when turning on the power.
Display on Digital Operator
Ground fault trip
The ground fault trip ek_k1k4 cannot be released with the reset input. Shut off the power and check the wiring.
Appears if the incoming voltage has remained high for 100 seconds while the Inverter output is stopped. Shuts off the output if the temperature has risen in the main circuit due to malfunction of the cooling fan or other reasons. Shuts off the output if overcurrent is detected in the main circuit. While the thermistor input function is used, this detects the resistance of the external thermistor and shuts off the Inverter output. With the emergency shutoff selected (DIP switch on the control board SW8 = ON), this error appears when an emergency shutoff signal is input from multi-function input terminal 3. Occurs when the communication watchdog timer times out.
ek_k1k4
Incoming overvoltage trip Temperature error Driver error Thermistor error
ek_k1k5 ek_k2k1 ek_k3k0 ek_k3k5
Emergency shutoff Communications error
5
ek_k3k7 ek_k6k0
5-2
Other Displays
Name Description Display on Digital Operator
Reset
Appears with the [RS] terminal turned ON or during initialization.
Undervoltage standby Restart during momentary power interruption Restart during trip Setting initialization
Appears when the Inverter is in the undervoltage standby condition or with the power shut off.
The restart function is in operation.
Appears while the set values are being initialized.
0 0
Trip monitor initialization
Appears while the trip monitor is being initialized.
No data
Appears if no data exists. (Trip monitor) Appears if an error occurs between the Digital Operator and the Inverter.
Communications error
5-3
Trip Monitor Display

(1) Cause of trip Explanation of display
ekLk0k7
ekLk0k7
Indicates the cause of the trip. Refer to 5-1.
Lk6k0.0
(2) Output frequency (Hz) when the trip occurred
LkLk4.0
(3) Output current (A) when the trip occurred
Lk3k9k8.
(4) DC voltage (V) between P and N when the trip occurred
LkLk1k5
(5) Total time of operation before the trip
LkLk1k8
(6) Total time of power distribution before the trip
5-4
5-2 Troubleshooting
5-2 Troubleshooting
Situation The motor doesn't work. No voltage observed for Inverter outputs U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Possible cause Remedy
Is the A001 setting (frequency reference selection) correct? Is the A002 setting (RUN command selection) correct? Is power supplied to terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3? If so, the POWER LED indicator should light up. Does the display show "E **"? Is the allocation of the multi-function input correct? Is the RUN key (RUN command) turned on? Are FW (or RV) input and terminal SC or PSC connected? Is the frequency set with F001 selected? Is the potentiometer connected to terminals FS/FV/FC? Are RS and FRS inputs still turned on?
Check the A001 setting. Check the A002 setting. Check the connections of terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and U/T1, V/T2, W/T3. Turn on the power. Press the Mode key to confirm the status, and then reset. Check the allocation of the multifunction inputs: C001 to C005 Turn on the RUN key (RUN command). Connect FW (or RV) input to terminal SC or PSC. Press the key to set the frequency. If terminal mode is selected, set the potentiometer to FS/FV/FC. Turn off these inputs. Release the restraint and reduce the load. Operate the motor separately.
Voltage observed for Inverter outputs U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Motor rotation is in reverse.
Is the motor restrained? Or is it overloaded?
Are output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 correct? Is the phase sequence of the motor U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, and is the rotation in forward or reverse? Is the control circuit terminal correct? Is F004 set correctly in the motor rotation direction selection via the Digital Operator?
Connect according to the motor phase sequence. (Generally, the sequence is U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 in forward.) Select FW for forward and RV for reverse.
Motor rotation speed does not rise.
Does not rise even after the frequency setting unit is turned on with correct wiring. Is the motor overloaded?
Replace the frequency setting unit.
Reduce the load. Motor rpm becomes lower than the set value due to the limit function if overloaded.
5-5
5-2 Troubleshooting
Situation Rotation is unstable.
Possible cause
Remedy
Is the load too varied? Is the power voltage varied? Is this situation observed at a specific frequency?
Increase the capacity of both the motor and Inverter. Reduce the variation. Finely adjust the output frequency. Check the V/F pattern according to the motor specifications. Check the transmission gear ratio. Input data again and press the Enter key.
Motor rotation doesn't match. Data value is abnormal. Does not change with data set.
Is the maximum frequency setting correct?
After changing the data using the Increment/Decrement key, the Enter key was not pressed before the power was turned off. Was the power turned off within 6 seconds of changing the data and pressing the Enter key?
Wait 6 seconds or more after changing data and pressing the Enter key. Check the selections of the setting modes of A001 and A002.
Data would not change.
Frequency would not change. Can neither operate nor stop.

Cannot change data.
Is the selection between operator and terminal modes correct?
Is the soft lock activated? Is the soft lock (data: 02 and 03) set in soft lock selection b031? Is it tripped?
Reset the SFT terminal. Set b031 to 00 or 01. Turn off the switch. Reset the trip.
Notes on Data Setting: Wait 6 seconds or more after changing data and pressing the Enter key to store it. The data may not be set correctly if you operate any key, perform the reset, or disconnect the power supply within 6 seconds.
5-6
5-2 Troubleshooting
5-7
Chapter 6 Inspection and Maintenance

6-1 Inspection and Maintenance ........................... 6-1 6-2 Storage.............................................................. 6-7
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance
6Inspection and Maintenance
WARNING
Do not remove the front cover during the power supply and 5 minutes after the power shutoff. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock. Do not change wiring, mode change switches (S7, S8), optional devices or replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not touch the Inverter fins, braking resistors and the motor, which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff. Doing so may result in a burn. Do not dismantle, repair or modify the product. Doing so may result in an injury.
Safety Information
Maintenance and Inspection
Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance, inspection or parts replacement.
Precautions for Use

Product Disposal
Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product.
6-1
General Precautions
Always keep the Inverter and area clean to prevent dust from entering. Take utmost care not to have the wires disconnected or connected wrongly. Tightly fix the terminals and connectors. Do not expose the electronic device to humidity, oil, dust and/or iron powder or shavings. Doing so may damage the insulation and result in an accident. Do not pull on the cables in connecting/disconnecting the connectors (cooling fan and control PCB cables). Doing so may result in fire or injury due to cable damage.
Inspection Item
Daily inspection Periodic inspection (about every year) Insulation resistance test (about every two years) Megger test Short-circuit the terminals as below to conduct the test.
6
+1 P/+2 N/-
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
500 V DC megger
* For 3G3JX-AE 's terminal symbols, R/L1 corresponds to L1, S/L2 to L2, and T/L3 to N/L3.
Make sure that the resistance between the main circuit terminal and ground is 5 M or more at 500 V DC megger. Do not conduct a withstand voltage test on any part of the Inverter. Doing so may result in the deterioration of parts. *To shorten non-operation time, we recommend always keeping a spare Inverter ready.
6-2
6-1 Inspection and Maintenance Daily Inspection and Periodic Inspection

Inspection part General Inspection item Ambient environment Inspection point Check ambient temperature, as well as checking for humidity, dust, hazardous gases, oil mist, etc. Inspection period
Daily Periodic
Inspection method Monitoring, visual inspection
Criteria Ambient temperature -10C to +40C With no freezing Ambient humidity 20% to 90% With no condensation
Standard replacement period
Meter Thermometer
Hygrometer
Entire device Check that there are no abnormal vibrations or sounds. Power supply Check that the main voltage circuit voltage is normal.
Visual or acoustic inspection Voltage measureme nt between terminals R/ L1, S/L2 and T/L3 on the Inverter terminal block. 3 The following conditions must be satisfied: (200-V class) 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz (400-V class) 380 to 480 V 50/60 Hz
Tester
Main circuit
General
Insulation resistance test (between main circuit terminal and ground terminal) Check that the screws are not loose.
Megger 5 M min. check (Refer to 62.) Tighten securely Tightening torque (excluding terminal block) M 3.5: 0.8 Nm M 4 : 1.2 Nm M 5 : 3.0 Nm
500 V DC megger
Check that no part has indications of overheating. Terminal block Smoothing capacitor Check that there is no damage. Check that there is no liquid leakage. Check that the safety valve has not come out. Check that there are no bulges. 3 3
Visual inspection Visual inspection Visual inspection No faults No faults

*1
*1. The life of the capacitor depends on ambient temperatures. Refer to the product life curve in Appendix-2. When the capacitor stops operating at the end of the product's life, the Inverter must be replaced. *2. Clean the Inverter periodically. Accumulated dust in or on the cooling fan or heat sink can cause the Inverter to overheat.
6-3
Inspection part Main circuit
Inspection item Relay terminal block Resistor
Inspection point Check that there is no abnormal sound during operation. Check that there are no large fissures or discoloration in the resistance insulation. Check that there are no abnormal vibrations or sounds. Check that there is no dirt or dust.*2 Check that the fan is mounted correctly.
Inspection period
Daily Periodic
Inspection method Acoustic inspection Visual inspection
Criteria No faults
Meter
No faults
Tester
Cooling fan
Rotate Smooth rotation manually when the power is off. Visual inspection Visual inspection 3 Measure the phaseto-phase voltage between Inverter output terminals U/ T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Voltage difference between phases 2% max.
2 to 3 years
Control circuit
Operation check
Check the balance of output voltage levels between phases in single Inverter run.
Digital multimeter Rectifier Voltmeter
Check that there are no errors in trip detection and the display circuit throughout the operation of sequence protection.
Parts General Check that there are check no abnormal odors or (including discoloration. PCB) Check that there is no
Simulate Operates with no the Inverter faults trip circuit output Ex) Use an external trip etc. Visual inspection No faults
3 3 Visual inspection
*1
significant rusting.
Capacitor Check that there is no
liquid leakage or deformation.
6-4
Inspection part Display
Inspection item Digital Operator
Inspection point Check that the display is clear. Check that there are no missing parts. Check that the LED indicators are lit properly.
Inspection period
Daily Periodic
Inspection method Visual inspection
Criteria Normal operation Display can be read
Meter
3 3 3
Measurement Methods of I/O Voltage, Current, and Electric Power 6

Below are general measurement devices for I/O voltage, current, and electric power. Measure effective values of fundamental wave for voltage, and all effective values for electric power.
General-purpose Inverter
R/L1
IR ER W11
R/L1
U/T1
IU EU-V W01
Power S/L2 supply T/L3
IS ES IT ET W12
S/L2
V/T2
IV EV-W W02
Motor
T/L3
W/T3
IW EW-U
Measurement item Power supply voltage EI Power supply current II Input electric power WI
Measurement point Phase-to-phase voltage between R-S, S-T, and T-R (ER) (ES) (ET) Current R, S, T (IR) (IS) (IT)
Measurement device
Note Effective value of fundamental wave
Measurement value reference Commercial current (200-V class) 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz (400-V class) 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Moving-iron voltmeter or Rectifier voltmeter
Moving iron ammeter
All effective values
Between R-S, S-T (W11) + (W12)
Electrodynamic wattmeter
Two-wattmeter method
6-5
Measurement item Input power factor PfI Output voltage EO Output current IO Output electric power WO Output power factor PfO
Measurement point
Measurement device
Note
Measurement value reference
Calculated from the measured values of power supply voltage EI, power supply current II, and input electric power WI.
Pf I =
WI EI I I
100 (%)
Between U-V, V-W, W-U (EU) (EV) (EW) Current U, V, W (IU) (IV) (IW)
Rectifier voltmeter
All effective values All effective values
Moving-iron voltmeter
Between U-V, V-W (W01) + (W02)
Electrodynamic wattmeter
Two-wattmeter method
Calculated from the measured values of output voltage EO, output current IO, and output electric power WO.
Wo Pf o= 100 (%) 3 Eo I o
Note 1: For voltage, use a measurement device that displays effective values of fundamental wave. For current and electric power, use a measurement device that displays all effective values. Note 2: The Inverter output waveform, under PWM control, may have a margin of error, especially at a low frequency. Use the above measurement devices and methods to ensure accuracy. Note 3: General-purpose testers are not applicable for measurement in many cases.
6-6
6-2 Storage
6-2 Storage
Ensure the following conditions when storing the Inverter temporarily or for a long term after purchase.
Ensure the following conditions when storing the Inverter temporarily for transportation. Storage temperature : -10C to 60C Humidity : 20% to 90% RH (Without condensation or freezing due to rapid temperature change) Do not store this unit in a place with dust, direct sunshine, corrosive gas, or combustible gas. The Inverter's smoothing capacitor characteristics will deteriorate if left unused for a long time, even with no power distribution, which will shorten its life.

6-7
Chapter 7 Specifications
7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 Standard Specification List ............................. 7-1 Measurement Method of Output Voltage ....... 7-5 Connection Example........................................ 7-6 Dimensional Drawing....................................... 7-8 Options.............................................................. 7-14
7-1 Standard Specification List
7Specifications

3-phase 200-V Class
Item Model name (3G3JX-) Applicable motor capacity *1 Rated output capacity (kVA) kW HP 200V 240 V A2002 0.2 1/4 0.4 0.5 A2004 0.4 1/2 0.9 1.0 A2007 0.75 1 1.3 1.6 3-phase 200-V class A2015 1.5 2 2.4 2.9 A2022 2.2 3 3.4 4.1 A2037 3.7 5 5.5 6.6 A2055 5.5 7.5 8.3 9.9 A2075 7.5 10 11.0 13.3
Rated input voltage Built-in filter Rated input current (A) Rated output voltage
*2
3-phase (3-wire) 200 V -15% to 240 V +10%, 50/60 Hz 5% Radio noise filter 1.8 3.4 5.2 9.3 13.0 20.0 30.0 40.0
3-phase: 200 to 240 V (for input voltage) 1.4 0.8 2.6 0.9 Self-cooling Approx. 50% 4.0 1.1 7.1 2.2 10.0 2.4 15.9 2.4 24.0 4.2 32.0 4.2
Rated output current (A)
Weight [kg] Cooling method At short-time deceleration*3 At capacitor feedback DC injection braking
Forced-air-cooling Approx. 20% to 40% Approx. 20%
Specifications
Braking torque
Injection braking frequency/time, braking force variable, frequency control available
7-1
7-1 Standard Specification List 3-phase 400-V Class

Item Model name (3G3JX-) Applicable motor capacity *1 Rated output capacity (kVA) kW HP 380 V 480 V A4004 0.4 1/2 0.9 1.2 A4007 0.75 1 1.6 2.0 3-phase 400-V class A4015 1.5 2 2.5 3.1 A4022 2.2 3 3.6 4.5 A4037 3.7 5 5.6 7.1 A4055 5.5 7.5 8.5 10.8 A4075 7.5 10 10.5 13.3
Rated input voltage Built-in filter Rated input current (A) Rated output voltage *2 Rated output current (A) Weight [kg] Cooling method At short-time deceleration*3 At capacitor feedback DC injection braking 1.5 1.5 2.0
3-phase (3-wire) 380 V -15% to 480 V +10%, 50/60 Hz 5% Radio noise filter 3.3 5.0 7.0 11.0 16.5 20.0
3-phase: 380 to 480 V (for input voltage) 2.5 2.3 3.8 2.4 5.5 2.4 8.6 2.4 Forced-air-cooling Approx. 20% to 40% Approx. 20% 13.0 4.2 16.0 4.2
Self-cooling Approx. 50%
Braking torque
1/3-phase 200-V Class

Item Model name (3G3JX-) Applicable motor capacity *1 Rated output capacity (kVA) kW HP 200 V 240 V AE002 0.2 1/4 0.4 0.5 AE004 0.4 1/2 0.9 1.0 1/3-phase 200-V class AE007 0.75 1 1.3 1.6 AE015 1.5 2 2.4 2.9 50/60 Hz 5% AE022 2.2 3 3.4 4.1
Specifications
Rated input voltage Built-in filter Rated input current (A) Rated output voltage
*2
1/3-phase 200 V -15% to 240 V +10% None 1.8 3.4 5.2
9.3
13.0
3-phase: 200 to 240 V (for input voltage) 1.4 0.8 2.6 0.9 Self-cooling Approx. 50% 4.0 1.5 7.1 2.3 10.0 2.4
Rated output current (A) Weight [kg] Cooling method At short-time deceleration*3 At capacitor feedback DC injection braking
Forced-air-cooling Approx. 20% to 40%
Braking torque
7-2
7-1 Standard Specification List Common Specifications

Item Enclosure rating *4 Control method Output frequency range *5 Semi-closed (IP20) Phase-to-phase sinusoidal modulation PWM 0.5 to 400 Hz Digital command: 0.01% of the max. frequency Analog command: 0.4% of the max. frequency (25C 10C) Digital setting: 0.1 Hz Analog setting: Max. frequency/1000 V/f characteristics (constant/reduced torque) 150% for 1 min Specifications
Frequency precision *6 Frequency setting resolution Control Voltage/Frequency characteristics Overload current rating
Acceleration/Deceleration 0.01 to 3000 s (line/curve selection), 2nd acceleration/deceleration setting available time Carrier frequency modification range DC injection braking 2 to 12 kHz Starts at a frequency lower than that in deceleration via the STOP command, at a value set lower than that during operation, or via an external input. (Level and time settable.) Overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, electronic thermal, temperature error, ground-fault overcurrent at power-on state, overload limit, incoming overvoltage, external trip, memory error, CPU error, USP trip, communication error, overvoltage protection during deceleration, momentary power interruption protection, emergency shutoff Setting with the FREQ adjuster and the Increment/Decrement keys on the Digital Operator, variable resistance from 1 to 2 k (2 W), 0 to 10 V DC (input impedance 10 k), 4 to 20 mA (input impedance 250 ), communication through an RS-485 port (ModBus communication). (Simultaneous inputs of FV/FI are not acceptable. Also, do not connect the signal lines for inputs FV and FI simultaneously. Forward/Stop via the RUN and STOP/RESET keys (parameter selection for Forward or Reverse), Reverse/Stop available at the time of multi-function input allocation (selectable from 1NO or 1NC), Run/Stop through external communication. FW (forward), RV (reverse), CF1 to CF4 (multi-step speed setting), JG (jogging), DB (external DC injection braking), SET (2nd function), 2CH (2-step acceleration/ deceleration), FRS (free run), EXT (external trip), USP (USP function), SFT (soft lock), AT (analog current input function selection), RS (reset) , PTC (thermistor input) , STA (3-wire startup), STP (3-wire stop), F/R (3-wire forward/reverse), PID (PID selection), PIDC (PID integral reset), UP (UP of UP/DWN function), DWN (DWN of UP/DWN function) , UDC (data clear of UP/DWN function), OPE (forced OPE mode), ADD (frequency addition), F-TM (forced terminal block), RDY (operation ready), SP-SET (special setting), EMR (emergency shutoff)
7
Protective functions
Specifications
Frequency settings Digital Operator signal Input signal Forward/ Reverse Run/Stop
Multi-function input
7-3
Item
Specifications RUN (signal during operation), FA1 (frequency arrival signal), FA2 (over set frequency arrival signal), OL (overload warning signal), OD (PID excess deviation signal), AL (alarm output), DC (analog input disconnection detection signal), FBV (PID FB status output), NDc (network error), LOG (logical operation result), ODc (Do not use.), LOC (light load detection signal) Analog output (0 to 10 V DC, 1 mA max.), Frequency/Current signals are selectable via the AM output terminal. The relay (SPDT contact) outputs signals corresponding to the multi-function output.
Output signal
Multi-function output
Frequency monitor Relay output
Other functions
AVR function, V/f characteristic selection, upper/lower limit, 16-step speeds, starting frequency adjustment, jogging operation, carrier frequency adjustment, PID control, frequency jump, analog gain/bias adjustment, Sshape acceleration/deceleration, electronic thermal characteristics/level adjustment, retry function, simplified torque boost, trip monitor, soft lock function, frequency conversion display, USP function, 2nd control function, motor rotation speed UP/DWN, overcurrent suppression function Ambient temperature -10C to 50C (Both the carrier frequency and output current need to be reduced at over 40C.) -20C to 65C (short-time temperature during transport) 20% to 90% RH 5.9 m/s2 (0.6G), 10 to 55 Hz (Complies with the test method specified in JIS C0040 (1999).) At a maximum altitude of 1,000 m; indoors (without corrosive gases or dust) Complies with UL, cUL, CE standards. (Insulation distance)
General specifications
Ambient storage temperature Humidity Vibration Location Applicable standard Options
Specifications
Noise filter, AC/DC reactors, regenerative braking unit and resistor, etc.
*1. The applicable motor is a 3-phase standard motor. For using any other type, be sure that the rated current does not exceed that of the Inverter. *2. Output voltage decreases according to the level of the power supply voltage. *3. The braking torque at the time of capacitor feedback is an average deceleration torque at the shortest deceleration (when it stops from 50 Hz), not a continuous regenerative torque. Also, the average deceleration torque varies depending on the motor loss. The value is reduced in operation at over 50 Hz. Note that no regenerative braking circuit is built into the Inverter. If you need a larger regenerative torque, use the optionally available regenerative braking unit and resistor. The regenerative braking unit should be used only for short-time regeneration. *4. Protection method complies with JEM 1030. *5. To operate the motor at over 50/60 Hz, contact the motor manufacturer to find out the maximum allowable number of revolutions. *6. For the stable control of the motor, the output frequency may exceed the maximum frequency set in A004 (A204) by 2 Hz max.
7-4
7-2 Measurement Method of Output Voltage
7-2 Measurement Method of Output Voltage

Measurement Method of Output Voltage
* R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 Motor Diode 600 V 0.01 A min. (200-V class) 1000 V 0.1 A min. (400-V class) 220 k 2W VDC
Specifications
Effective value of fundamental wave: VAC = 1.1 VDC
7-5
7-3 Connection Example

MC1 BS MC2 BSS Alarm wiring in the regenerative braking unit *7 MC1 *4 MC2 T *3 ELB MC1 MC2 R/L1 (L1) *6 3-phase AC *2 *5 S/L2 (L2) T/L3 (N/L3) PSC *1 S5 4.7 k 24 V DC
Inverter
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 Note: To connect the DC reactor, remove the short-circuit bar. +1 DC reactor P/+2 S4 S3 S2 S1 MB SC *1 MA MC Relay output Common RY N/(Inverter) P/+2 N/Regenerative braking unit
P/+
Motor
For Sink logic
Specifications
N/-
Frequency meter Frequency setting unit 1 to 2 k Power supply input 4 to 20 mA DC
AM 10 V DC FS FV FI FC *1 250 10 k PC *1 24 V DC P1
*1. Different terminals have different commons.

Terminals Commons Source logic - PSC S1, S2, S3, S4, S5 Sink logic - SC FC PC AM FS, FV, FI P1
Main circuit power supply *4 RUN command Output frequency Motor rotation speed
2.0 s min.
7-6
*2. For 400-V power supply, install a step-down transformer. *3. Install a fuse in the operating circuit. Not doing so may result in fire. *4. If the main circuit is turned on at the same time as a RUN command is input, the motor begins to rotate at least 2.0 seconds later. Secure a duty cycle of 5 minutes or more between switching the power ON/OFF. Otherwise, the life of the Inverter is shortened. *5. Do not turn off the main circuit during operation. *6. The items in parentheses indicate terminal symbols for 3G3JX-AE. *7. Refer to the wiring described in the Regenerative Braking Unit Users Manual, and take safety measures for overheating.
Specifications
7-7
7-4 Dimensional Drawing
7-4 Dimensional Drawing

3G3JX -A2002 AE002
80 67 5 6
143
155
Specifications
2.6
13
95.5
93
1.9
7-8
7-4 Dimensional Drawing 3G3JX -A2004 AE004

80 67 5 6
143
7
5
Specifications
155 27 109.5 1.9
107
7-9
2.6
7-4 Dimensional Drawing 3G3JX -A2007

80 67 5 6
143
155
7
1.9
Specifications
130
2.6
50
132.5
7-10
7-4 Dimensional Drawing 3G3JX -A4004 -AE007

110 98 5 6
176
7
5
Specifications
7-11
2.6
28
130.5
128
1.9
189
7-4 Dimensional Drawing 3G3JX -A2015/A2022/A2037 -A4007/A4015/A4022/A4037 -AE015/AE022

110 98 5 6
176
189
7
5
Specifications
55
157.5
1.9
7-12
7-4 Dimensional Drawing 3G3JX -A2055/A2075 -A4055/A4075
180 164
235
7
6
Specifications
250 90 167.5 1.9
165
7-13
1.6
7-5 Options
7-5 Options
Regenerative Braking Unit (3G3AX-RBU)
Dimensional Drawing
3G3AX-RBU21/-RBU22
95 5 75
2-5
145
7
208 218
Specifications
5 100
35
7-14
7-5 Options
3G3AX-RBU41
95 5 75
2-5
145
208
218
35 100
Specifications
Specifications
Applicable voltage class Model Connectable resistance Operating voltage ON/OFF Operation indication Parallel interlocking operation function Resistance Built-in resistor Allowable consecutive ON time Allowable operation cycle Power consumption 3G3AX-RBU21 17 min. ON: 362.5 5 V OFF: 355 5 V LED ON (Lit) 5 units max. 120 W, 180 10 s max. Cycle 1/10 (ON for 10 s, OFF for 90 s) Instantaneous 0.73 kW Short-time rating 120 W 120 W, 20 0.5 s max. 120 W, 180 2 in series 10 s max. 200-V class 3G3AX-RBU22 17 min. 400-V class 3G3AX-RBU41 34 min. ON: 725 5 V OFF: 710 5 V
Cycle 1/80 Cycle 1/10 (ON for 0.5 s, OFF for 40 s) (ON for 10 s, OFF for 90 s) Instantaneous 6 kW Short-time rating 120 W (Instantaneous 0.73 kW, rating 120 W) 2 in series
7-15
7-5 Options
Applicable voltage class Protective Functions
200-V class
400-V class
Built-in resistance overheat protection
Built-in relay specifications Built-in resistor temperature The temperature relay operates at approx. 200C or more, and recovers at approx. 170C or less. Thermal fuse is built in.(Not recoverable) *1 Rating of contact: 250 V AC 200 mA (R load) 12 V DC 500 mA (R load) 42 V DC 200 mA (R load) Minimum load 1 mA 10C to 50C 20C to 65C (short-time temperature during transport) 20% to 90% (with no condensation) 5.9 m/s2 (0.6G) 10 to 55 Hz At a maximum altitude of 1,000 m; indoors (without corrosive gases or dust)
Operating Environment
Ambient temperature Ambient storage temperature Humidity Vibration Location
*1 The thermal fuse is included in the built-in resistor. If the alarm is not connected, the fuse may burn out for overheat protection. The built-in resistor must be replaced if the fuse burns out.
Specifications
7-16
7-5 Options
DC Reactor (3G3AX-DL)
Dimensional Drawing
Ground terminal (M5)
Y D
2-K X W 2-K
X W
4-C Ground terminal (M4)
MAX B
Y D 4-C
MAX B
MAX H
7
Figure 1 Figure 2
Specifications
Specifications
Inverter input power supply Model 3G3AXDL2002 3G3AXDL2004 3G3AXDL2007 3/1-phase 200 V AC 3G3AXDL2015 3G3AXDL2022 3G3AXDL2037 3G3AXDL2055 3G3AXDL2075 Figure No. Applicable Inverter capacity (kw) 0.2 0.4 0.75 Fig. 1 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 Fig. 2 7.5 111 100 212 120 95 80 7 11 M6 3.9 14 mm2 min. 66 86 86 111 90 100 100 100 98 116 118 210 115 105 120 110 56 71 71 95 72 80 80 80 5.2 8 69 69 7 11 M4 M4 M4 M5 1.6 2.1 2.6 3.6 2 mm2 min. 2 mm2 min. 3.5 mm2 min. 8 mm2 min. Dimensions (mm) Bmax: coil dimensions W 66 66 66 D 90 90 90 H 98 98 98 B 85 95 105 X 56 56 56 Y 72 72 72 C 5.2 8 5.2 8 5.2 8 K M4 M4 M4 Weight (kg) 0.8 1.0 1.3 Wire size 1.25 mm2 min. 1.25 mm2 min. 2 mm2 min.
7-17
MAX H
7-5 Options
Inverter input power supply
Model 3G3AXDL4004 3G3AXDL4007 3G3AXDL4015
Figure No.
Applicable Inverter capacity (kw) 0.4 0.75 1.5
Dimensions (mm) Bmax: coil dimensions W 66 66 66 86 86 111 111 D 90 90 90 100 100 100 100 H 98 98 98 116 116 138 138 B 85 95 115 105 120 110 115 X 56 56 56 71 71 95 95 Y 72 72 72 80 80 80 80 C 5.2 8 5.2 8 5.2 8 69 69 7 11 7 11 K M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4
Weight (kg) 0.8 1.1 1.6 2.1 2.6 3.6 3.9
Wire size 1.25 mm2 min. 1.25 mm2 min. 2 mm2 min. 2 mm2 min. 2 mm2 min. 3.5 mm2 min. 3.5 mm2 min.
3-phase 400 V AC
3G3AXDL4022 3G3AXDL4037 3G3AXDL4055 3G3AXDL4075
Fig. 1
2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
Operating Environment
Ambient temperature Humidity Vibration Location -10C to 50C 20% to 90% RH (with no condensation) 15 kW max. 5.9 m/s2 max. (0.6G) 10 to 55 Hz 22 kW max. 2.0 m/s2 max. (0.2G) 10 to 55 Hz At a maximum altitude of 1,000 m; indoors (without corrosive gases or dust)
Specifications
7-18
7-5 Options
Input Noise Filter (3G3AX-NFI)

Dimensional Drawing
3G3AX-NFI21 3G3AX-NFI22
66 52 (10)
Inverter side
L3' L2' L1'
(84)
Power supply side

2-5.0
L3 L2 L1
10
M4
Specifications
3G3AX-NFI23/3G3AX-NFI24 3G3AX-NFI41/3G3AX-NFI42 3G3AX-NFI43/

Dimensions (Unit: mm)
74 C
67MAX
7
(15)
100
117
Model A
5
B 118 130 130 130 130
C 56 56 56 56 56
D 10 11 11 11 11
Inverter side
128 144 144 144 144
L3' L2' L1'
3G3AX-NFI41
(95) A B
L3 L2 L1
Power supply side
(D)
M4
7-19
(15)
73
7-5 Options
3G3AX-NFI25
2-4.56
Power supply side

M6
L1 L2 L3
L1' L2' L3'
Inverter side
2-4.5 (16) 65 90 95
(95) 155 165
7
Specifications
Power supply Model 3G3AX-NFI21 3-phase 250 V +10% Max. 3G3AX-NFI22 3G3AX-NFI23 3G3AX-NFI24 3G3AX-NFI25 3-phase 480 V +10% Max. 3G3AX-NFI41 3G3AX-NFI42 3G3AX-NFI43 Applicable Inverter capacity (kw) 0.2 to 0.75 1.5 2.2, 3.7 5.5 7.5 0.4 to 2.2 3.7 5.5, 7.5 Rated input current In (A) at an ambient temperature of 50C 36A 3 10 A 3 20 A 3 30 A 3 40 A 37A 3 10 A 3 20 A Power loss (W) 3 4 6 9 12 2 4 6 Leakage current (mA/phase) at 60 Hz < 1.5 (250 V) < 1.5 (250 V) < 1.5 (250 V) < 1.5 (250 V) < 1.5 (250 V) < 7.5 (250 V) < 7.5 (250 V) < 7.5 (250 V)
Specifications
Model 3G3AX-NFI21 3G3AX-NFI22
Case, Enclosure rating
Screw size
Wire size 1.25 mm 2 mm2

2
Weight (kg) 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.4
M4 3G3AX-NFI23 3G3AX-NFI24 Plastic, IP00 3G3AX-NFI25 3G3AX-NFI41 3G3AX-NFI42 3G3AX-NFI43 M4 M5
2 mm2, 3.5 mm2 5.5 mm 8

2
mm2
2,
1.25 mm
mm2
0.7 0.7
2 mm2 2 mm2, 3.5 mm2
0.7
7-20
7-5 Options
EMC-compatible Noise Filter (3G3AX-EFI)

Dimensional Drawing
3G3AX-EFIB1/-EFI21
10 80 7.5 6.5 67 6.5 57
L1 L2 L3 R S T
18
66
2-M4 176.6 205 190
7
7.5 4-5
Specifications
7-21
40
110
44
7-5 Options
3G3AX-EFIB2/-EFI22
10 110 7.5 6 98 6 57
L1 L2 L3/N R S T
18
66
176.6
205
190
118
7.5
110
4-5 67 40
8-M4
44
Specifications
3G3AX-EFIB3/-EFI23
10 7.5 6 140 128 6 57
L1 L2 L3 R S T
18
66
7-M4 98 226.6 255 240
168
7.5
4-5 45
118
44
7-22
7-5 Options
3G3AX-EFI24
10 7.5 6 140 128 6 57
L1 L2 L3 R S T
18
66
98 226.6 255 240
7-M4
168
7.5
4-5 45
Specifications
7-23
118
44
7-5 Options
3G3AX-EFI25
10 2
L1 L2 L3 R S T
205 235
308.5 331 355
260 MIN
7
40 160 164 182
Specifications
60
7-24
7-5 Options
3G3AX-EFI41/-EFI42
74 56 5
(95)
144
130
11
M4
Specifications
3G3AX-EFI43/-EFI44/-EFI45
(16) 65 90 95
7-25
(95) 155 165
(15)
73
7-5 Options Specifications

Applicable Inverter capacity (kw) Power supply Model 1-phase 200 V 0.2, 0.4 0.75 1.5, 2.2 3-phase 200 V 0.2, 0.4 0.75 1.5, 2.2 3.7 5.5, 7.5 0.4, 0.75 1.5 2.2, 3.7 5.5 7.5 3-phase 400 V 0.4 to 1.5 2.2, 3.7 5.5, 7.5 0.4 to 2.2 3.7 5.5, 7.5 Screw size Input current In (A) 26A 2 10 A 2 21 A 34A 3 5.2 A 3 14 A 3 22 A 3 40 A 37A 3 10 A 3 20 A 3 30 A 3 40 A Leakage current (mA/ phase at 60 Hz) 15 mA 16 mA 16 mA 16 mA 90 mA 150 mA 150 mA 170 mA 170 mA 170 mA Leakage current (mA/phase at 50 Hz) <9 <9 <9 < 3.5 < 3.5 < 3.5 < 3.5 < 3.5 < 7.5 < 7.5 < 7.5 < 7.5 < 7.5
Class
3G3AX-EFIB1 1-phase 200 V AC 3G3AX-EFIB2 3G3AX-EFIB3 3G3AX-EFI21 3G3AX-EFI22 3-phase 200 V AC 3G3AX-EFI23 3G3AX-EFI24 3G3AX-EFI25 3G3AX-EFI41 3G3AX-EFI42 3-phase 200/400 V AC 3G3AX-EFI43 3G3AX-EFI44 3G3AX-EFI45
B B B B B B B B A A A A A
Model 3G3AX-EFIB1 3G3AX-EFIB2 3G3AX-EFIB3 3G3AX-EFI21
Case, Enclosure rating
Wire size 1.3 mm2 2.1 mm2 3.3 to 5.3 mm

2
Weight (kg)
Specifications
0.43 0.6 0.88 0.56 0.72 1.2 1.3

2
M4 Aluminum IP20
1.3 mm
3G3AX-EFI22 3G3AX-EFI23 3G3AX-EFI24 3G3AX-EFI25 3G3AX-EFI41 M4 3G3AX-EFI42 3G3AX-EFI43 3G3AX-EFI44 3G3AX-EFI45 Plastic, IP00 M5 M5
1.3 mm2 2.1 mm2 3.3 mm2
3.3 to 8.4 mm
2.4 0.7 0.7
1.25 mm2, 2 mm2 2 mm2 2 mm 3.5 5.5 mm

2,
mm2
2
1.0 1.3 1.4
8 mm2
7-26
7-5 Options
Output Noise Filter (3G3AX-NFO)

Dimensional Drawing
3G3AX-NFO01/-NFO02
3G3AX-NFO03/-NFO04
Specifications
Specifications
Power supply 3-phase (3-wire) rated voltage 500 V AC Model Rated current (A) 6 12 25 50 Applicable motor (kW) 200-V class 0.75 max. 1.5, 2.2 3.7, 5.5 7.5 400-V class 2.2 max. 3.7 5.5, 7.5 External dimensions (H W D) (mm) 156 95 50 176 110 70 154 160 120 210 200 150 Weight (kg) 1.0 1.1 1.8 3.8
3G3AX-NFO01 3G3AX-NFO02 3G3AX-NFO03 3G3AX-NFO04
7-27
7-5 Options
AC Reactor (3G3AX-AL)
Dimensional Drawing
3G3AX-AL2025/-AL2055
D max E max
Ro R So S To T
H max
X A max
Y C max
3G3AX-AL2110
A max Ro R So S To T D max E max
H1 max
Specifications
H max
Y C max
3G3AX-AL4025/-AL4055/-AL4110
D max E max
Ro R So S To T
H max
H1 max
X A max
Y C max
H1 max
7-28
7-5 Options Specifications

Power supply Model 3G3AXAL2025 3-phase 200 V AC 3G3AXAL2055 3G3AXAL2110 3G3AXAL4025 3-phase 400 V AC 3G3AXAL4055 3G3AXAL4110 Applicable Inverter capacity (kw) 0.2 to 1.5 2.2, 3.7 5.5, 7.5 0.4 to 1.5 2.2, 3.7 5.5, 7.5 External dimensions A 130 140 160 130 130 160 C 82 98 103 82 98 116 D 60 60 70 60 60 75 E 40 40 55 40 40 55 H 150 150 170 150 150 170 H1 92 92 106 92 92 106 X 50 50 60 50 50 60 Y 67 75 80 67 75 98 Weight (kg) 2.8 4.0 5.0 2.7 4.0 6.0
Specifications
7-29
7-5 Options
Digital Operator (3G3AX-OP01)

(7) 10 2.7
Data display RUN command LED indicator
Operation keys
FREQ adjuster
2-M3 Depth 5 20.5 2-4 18
18
Specifications
15.3
16.5
Panel cutout dimension
External dimensions
Height (55 mm) Width (70 mm) Depth (10 mm)
8.8
7-30
7-5 Options
Specifications
7-31
Appendix
Appendix-1 Parameter List............................. App-1 Appendix-2 Product Life Curve...................... App-17
Appendix-1 Parameter List
AppAppendix

Monitor Mode (d) / Basic Function Mode (F)
Parameter No. d001 d002 d003 Name Output frequency monitor Output current monitor Rotation direction monitor Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 0.0 to 400.0 0.0 to 999.9 F: Forward o: Stop r: Reverse 0.00 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 9999. (Enabled when the PID function is selected)
ON OFF S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
Default setting
Unit
Set value
Hz A
d004
PID feedback value monitor
d005
Example) Terminal S4, S2: ON Terminal S5, S3, S1: OFF Example) Terminal P1: ON Terminal MA: OFF
d006

MA P1
ON OFF
Appendix
d007
0.00 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 9999. 1000 to 3996 (10000 to 39960) (Output frequency Conversion factor of b086)
d013 d016
Output voltage monitor 0. to 600. Total RUN Time 0. to 9999. 1000 to 9999 100 to 999[h] 0. to 9999. 1000 to 9999 100 to 999[h] 0.0 to 200.0 0. to 9999.
V h
d017
Power ON time monitor Fin temperature monitor Fault frequency monitor
d018 d080 d081 d082 d083
Fault monitor 1 (Latest) Error code (condition of occurrence) Output frequency [Hz] Output current [A] Fault monitor 2 Internal DC voltage [V] RUN time [h] ON time [h] Fault monitor 3
App-1
Parameter No. d102 d104 F001
Name DC voltage monitor Electronic thermal monitor Output frequency setting/monitor Acceleration time 1
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 100.0 Starting frequency to 1st or 2nd max. frequency 0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000. 0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000. 0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000. 0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000. 00: Forward 01: Reverse
Default setting
Changes during operation Yes
Unit V % Hz
Set value
F002
10.0
Yes
F202
*2nd acceleration time 1
10.0
Yes
F003
Deceleration time 1
10.0
Yes
F203
*2nd deceleration time 1 Operator rotation direction selection
10.0
Yes
F004
00
No
* 2nd function is displayed when SET(08) is allocated to one of from C001 to C005.
Extended function mode

Parameter No. Function name Frequency reference selection *2nd frequency reference selection RUN command selection *2nd RUN command selection Base frequency *2nd base frequency Maximum frequency *2nd maximum frequency Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster) 01: Terminal 02: Digital Operator (F001) 03: ModBus communication 10: Frequency operation result Default setting Changes during operation No Unit Set value
Appendix
A001
00
A201
00
No
A002 Basic setting
A202 A003 A203 A004 A204
01: Terminal 02: Digital Operator 03: ModBus communication 30. to Max. frequency [A004] 30. to Max. frequency [A204]
02
No
02 60. 60. 60.
No
No
Hz
30. to 400. 60.
No
Hz
App-2
Parameter No.
Function name
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 02: Switches between FV/FREQ adjuster via terminal AT 03: Switches between FI/FREQ adjuster via terminal AT 04: FV input only 05: FI input only
Default setting
Unit
Set value
A005
FV/FI selection
02
No
Analog input
A011 A012 A013 A014 A015 A016
FV start frequency 0.0 to Max. frequency FV end frequency FV start ratio FV end ratio FV start selection FV, FI sampling Multi-step speed reference 0 0.0 to Max. frequency 0. to 100. 0. to 100. 00: External start frequency (A011 set value) 01: 0 Hz 1. to 17.
0.0 0.0 0. 100. 01 8.
No No No No No No
Hz Hz % %
A020
6.0
Yes
Hz
A220
*2nd multi-step speed reference 0
0.0/Starting frequency to 2nd max. frequency
6.0
Yes
Hz
Appendix
App-3
Parameter No. A021 A022 A023 A024 A025 A026 A027 A028 A029 A030 A031 A032 A033 A034 A035 A038 A039
Function name Multi-step speed reference 1 Multi-step speed reference 2 Multi-step speed reference 3 Multi-step speed reference 4 Multi-step speed reference 5 Multi-step speed reference 6 Multi-step speed reference 7 Multi-step speed reference 8 Multi-step speed reference 9 Multi-step speed reference 10 Multi-step speed reference 11 Multi-step speed reference 12 Multi-step speed reference 13 Multi-step speed reference 14 Multi-step speed reference 15
Default setting 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Unit
Set value
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Yes
Hz
Appendix
0.0 0.0 0.0 6.00 00 Yes No Hz
Jogging frequency 0.00/Starting frequency to 9.99 Jogging stop selection 00: Free-run stop 01: Deceleration stop 02: DC injection braking stop
App-4
Parameter No. A041 A241 A042
Function name Torque boost selection *2nd torque boost selection Manual torque boost voltage *2nd manual torque boost voltage Manual torque boost frequency *2nd manual torque boost frequency V/f characteristics selection *2nd V/f characteristics selection Output voltage gain 20. to 100. *2nd output voltage gain DC injection braking selection DC injection braking frequency DC injection braking delay time DC injection braking power DC injection braking time DC injection braking method selection 0.0 to 50.0 0.0 to 20.0
Default setting 00
Unit
Set value
00: Manual torque boost only 01: Automatic (simple) torque boost 00 5.0
No
Yes 0.0
Characteristics, Torque boost
A242
A043
2.5 Yes 0.0 %
A243
A044
A244
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC) 01: Reduced torque characteristics (VP 1.7th power) 06: Special reduced torque characteristics (Special VP)
00 No 00 -
A045 A245
100. Yes 100. 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 02: Frequency control [A052 set value] 0.0 to 60.0 0.0 to 5.0 0. to 100. 0.0 to 60.0 00: Edge operation 01: Level operation %
Appendix
A051
00
No
DC injection braking
A052 A053 A054 A055
0.5 0.0 50 0.5
No No No No
Hz s % s
A056
01
No
App-5
Parameter No. A061 A261 A062 Upper/Lower limit, Jump A262 A063 A064 A065 A066 A067 A068 A071 A072 A073 A074 PID control A075
Function name Frequency upper limit *2nd frequency upper limit Frequency lower limit *2nd frequency lower limit Jump frequency 1 Jump frequency width 1 Jump frequency 2 Jump frequency width 2 Jump frequency 3 Jump frequency width 3 PID selection PID P gain PID I gain PID D gain PID scale PID feedback selection
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 0.0/Frequency lower limit to Max. frequency 0.0/Frequency lower limit to 2nd Max. frequency 0.0/Starting frequency to Frequency upper limit 0.0/Starting frequency to 2nd frequency upper limit
Default setting 0.0
Unit
Set value
No 0.0 0.0 No 0.0 0.0 0.5
Hz
Hz
Jump frequency: 0.0 to 400.0 Jump frequency width: 0.0 to 10.0
0.0 0.5 0.0 0.5 No Hz
00: Disabled 01: Enabled 0.2 to 5.0 0.0 to 150.0 0.00 to 100.0 0.01 to 99.99 00: FI 01: FV 02: RS485 communication 10: Operation function output 00: OFF (Deviation = Target value - Feedback value) 01: ON (Deviation = Feedback value - Target value) 0.00 to 100.0 00: Always ON 01: Always OFF 02: OFF during deceleration 200-V class: 200/215/220/230/240 400-V class: 380/400/415/440/460/480
00 1.0 1.0 0.0 1.00
No Yes Yes Yes No
s s Time
Appendix
A076
00
No
A077
Reverse PID function PID output limit function AVR selection AVR voltage selection
00
No
A078
0.0
No
A081 AVR
02 200/ 400
No
A082
No
App-6
Parameter No. A085
Function name RUN mode selection Energy-saving response/ accuracy adjustment Acceleration time 2 *2nd acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 *2nd deceleration time 2 2-step acceleration/ deceleration selection *2nd 2-step acceleration/ deceleration selection 2-step acceleration frequency *2nd 2-step acceleration frequency 2-step deceleration frequency
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: Normal operation 01: Energy-saving operation
Default setting 00
Unit
Set value
A086
0 to 100
50
No
A092 A292 A093 RUN mode, Acceleration/Deceleration functions A293
0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000.
15.00 Yes 15.00 15.00 Yes 15.00 s s
0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000. to 3000.
A094
00 00: Switched via multi-function input 09 (2CH) 01: Switched by setting 00 No
A294
A095
0.0 0.0 to 400.0 0.0 No Hz
Appendix
A295
A096
0.0 0.0 to 400.0 No 0.0 00: Line 01: S-shape curve 00: Line 01: S-shape curve Hz
A296
*2nd 2-step deceleration frequency Acceleration pattern selection Deceleration pattern selection
A097 A098
00 00
No No
App-7
Parameter No. External frequency adjustment A101 A102 A103 A104 A105
Function name
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 0.0 to 400.0 0.0 to 400.0 0. to 100. 0. to 100. 00: Use FI start frequency [A101] 01: 0 Hz start 00: Digital Operator (F001) 01: Digital Operator (FREQ adjuster) 02: Input FV 03: Input FI 04: RS485 communication
Default setting 0.0 0.0 0. 100. 01
Changes during operation No No No No No
Unit
Set value
FI start frequency FI end frequency FI start ratio FI end ratio FI start selection Operation frequency input A setting Operation frequency input B setting
Hz Hz % %
Operation frequency
A141
01
No
A142
02
No
A143
00: Addition (A + B) Operator selection 01: Subtraction (A - B) 02: Multiplication (A B) Frequency addition amount 0.0 to 400.0
00
No
Frequency addition
A145
0.0
Yes
Hz
A146 A151
00: Adds A145 value to output frequency 01: Subtract A145 value from output frequency
00 0.0 0.0 0. 100. 01
No No No No No No
Appendix
VR start frequency 0.0 to 400.0 VR end frequency VR start ratio VR end ratio VR start selection 0.0 to 400.0 0. to 100. 0. to 100. 00: Use VR start frequency [A151] 01: 0 Hz start
Hz Hz % %
VR adjustment
A152 A153 A154 A155
App-8
Parameter No.
Function name
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: Alarm 01: 0 Hz start 02: Frequency matching start 03: Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 0.3 to 25.0 0.3 to 100.0
Default setting
Unit
Set value
b001 Restart during momentary power interruption
Retry selection
00
No
b002 b003
Allowable momentary power interruption time Retry wait time Momentary power interruption/ undervoltage trip during stop selection Momentary power interruption retry time selection Starting frequency at frequency pullin restart Electronic thermal level
1.0 1.0
No No
s s
b004
00: Disabled 01: Enabled
00
No
b005
00: 16 times 01: No limit 00: Frequency at interruption 01: Max. frequency 02: Set frequency
00
No
b011
00 Rated current
No
b012 Electronic thermal b212
0.2 Rated current to 1.0 Rated current *2nd electronic thermal level Electronic thermal characteristics selection *2nd electronic thermal characteristics selection Rated current 00 00: Reduced torque characteristics 1 01: Constant torque characteristics 02: Reduced torque characteristics 2 00
No
Appendix
b013
No
b213
App-9
Function name Overload limit selection *2nd overload limit selection Overload limit level
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: Disabled 01: Enabled in acceleration/constant speed operation 02: Enabled in constant speed operation
Default setting 01
Unit
Set value
No 01 1.5 Rated current
b022 Overload limit
0..1 Rated current to 1.5 Rated current b222 *2nd overload limit level Overload limit parameter 0.1 to 3000.0 b223 b028 b228 *2nd overload limit parameter Overload limit source selection *2nd overload limit source selection Deceleration rate constant at frequency pull-in restart Frequency pull-in restart level 1.0 00 00: b022, b222 set values 01: Input terminal FV 00 1.5 Rated current 1.0
No
b023
No
No
Frequency pull-in
b029
0.1 to 3000.0
0.5
No
b030
0.2 Rated current to 2.0 Rated current 00: Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON. 01: Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON. 02: Data other than b031 cannot be changed. 03: Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed. 10: Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed.
Rated current
No
Appendix
Lock
b031
Soft lock selection
01
No
App-10
Parameter No.
Function name Selection of nonstop function at momentary power interruption Starting voltage of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Stop deceleration level of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Deceleration time of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Deceleration starting width of non-stop function at momentary power interruption Overvoltage protection proportional gain during deceleration Overvoltage protection integral time during deceleration AM adjustment Starting frequency Carrier frequency Initialization selection Initialization parameter selection
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: Disabled 01: Enabled (Stop) 02: Enabled (Restart)
Default setting
Unit
Set value
b050 Non-stop function at momentary power interruption
00
No
b051
0.0 to 1000.
0.0
No
b052
0.0 to 1000.
0.0
No
b053
0.01 to 99.99 100.0 to 999.9 1000 to 3000
1.0
No
b054
0.0 to 10.0
0.0
No
Hz
b055
0.2 to 5.0
0.2
Yes
Appendix
Others
b056
0.0 to 150.0 0. to 255. (Shared with C086 for AM offset adjustment) 0.5 to 9.9 2.0 to 12.0 00: Clears the trip monitor 01: Initializes data 02: Clears the trip monitor and initializes data 00 * Do not change.
0.2
Yes
b080 b082 b083 Initialization b084
100. 1.5 3.0 00
Yes No No No
Hz kHz
b085
00
No
App-11
Parameter No.
Function name Frequency conversion coefficient STOP key selection Free-run stop selection
Default setting
Changes during operation Yes No No
Unit
Set value
b086 b087 b088
0.1 to 99.9 00: Enabled 01: Disabled 00: 0 Hz start 01: Frequency pull-in restart 01: Output frequency monitor 02: Output current monitor 03: Rotation direction monitor 04: PID feedback value monitor 05: Multi-function input monitor 06: Multi-function output monitor 07: Frequency conversion monitor 00: Deceleration Stop 01: Free-run stop
1.0 00 00
b089
01
Yes
b091 b092 Others b130 b131
Stop selection
00 01 00 380/ 760
No No No Yes
00: Always ON Cooling fan control 01: ON during RUN 02: Depends on the fin temperature Overvoltage LAD stop function Overvoltage LAD stop function level setting Overvoltage protection function selection during deceleration Overvoltage protection level setting during deceleration Overcurrent suppression function Automatic carrier reduction Ready function selection 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 200-V class: 330. to 395. 400-V class: 660. to 790. 00: Disabled 01: Enabled
b133
00
No
Appendix
b134
200-V class: 330. to 395. 400-V class: 660. to 790. 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 00: Disabled 01: Enabled 00: Disabled 01: Enabled
380/ 760
No
b140 b150 b151
01 00 00
No No No
App-12
Parameter No.
Function name
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: FW (forward) 01: RV (reverse) 02: CF1 (multi-step speed setting binary 1) 03: CF2 (multi-step speed setting binary 2) 04: CF3 (multi-step speed setting binary 3) 05: CF4 (multi-step speed setting binary 4) 06: JG (jogging) 07: DB (external DC injection braking) 08: SET (2nd control) 09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration) 11: FRS (free-run stop) 12: EXT (external trip) 13: USP (USP function) 15: SFT (soft lock) 16: AT (analog input switching) 18: RS (reset) 19: PTC (thermistor input) 20: STA (3-wire start) 21: STP (3-wire stop) 22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse) 23: PID (PID enabled/disabled) 24: PIDC (PID integral reset) 27: UP (UP/DWN function accelerated) 28: DWN (UP/DWN function decelerated) 29: UDC (UP/DWN function data clear) 31: OPE (forced operator) 50: ADD (frequency addition) 51: F-TM (forced terminal block) 52: RDY (ready function) 53: SP-SET (special 2nd function) 64: EMR (emergency shutoff *1) 255: No function *1. The EMR is set forcibly with switch S8, not with parameters.
Default setting
Unit
Set value
C001
Multi-function input 1 selection *2nd multi-function input 1 selection Multi-function input 2 selection *2nd multi-function input 2 selection Multi-function input 3 selection *2nd multi-function input 3 selection Multi-function input 4 selection *2nd multi-function input 4 selection Multi-function input 5 selection *2nd multi-function input 5 selection Multi-function input 1 operation selection Multi-function input 2 operation selection Multi-function input 3 operation selection Multi-function input 4 operation selection Multi-function input 5 operation selection
00
C201
00
C002
01
C202
01
C003
18 No 18
C203 Multi-function input terminals
C004
12
C204
12
C005
02
Appendix
C205
02
C011
00
C012
00 00: NO 01: NC
C013
00
No
C014
00
C015
00
App-13
Parameter No.
Function name
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 00: RUN (signal during RUN) 01: FA1 (constant speed arrival signal) 02: FA2 (over set frequency arrival signal) 03: OL (overload warning) 04: OD (excessive PID deviation) 05: AL (alarm output) 06: Dc (disconnection detection) 07: FBV (PID FB status output) 08: NDc (network error) 09: LOG(logic operation output) 10: ODc (Do not use.) 43: LOC (light load detection signal) 00: Output frequency 01: Output current
Default setting
Unit
Set value
C021
00
No
Multi-function output setting
C026
Relay output (MA, MB) function selection
05
C028
AM selection Multi-function output terminal P1 contact selection Relay output (MA, MB) contact selection Light load signal output mode Light load detection level Overload warning level *2nd overload warning level Arrival frequency during acceleration Arrival frequency during deceleration PID deviation excessive level PID FB upper limit
00
No
C031
00 00: NO contact at MA; NC contact at MB 01: NC contact at MA; NO contact at MB 01 00: Enabled during acceleration/deceleration/ constant speed 01: Enabled only during constant speed 0.0 to 2.0 Rated current (0.0 setting: Function disable) No
C036
C038
01 Rated current Rated current
No
C039 C041 C241 Level output status setting
No
0.0: Does not operate 0.1 Rated current to 2.0 Rated current
Appendix
No Rated current 0.0 No
C042
0.0 to 400.0
Hz
C043
0.0 to 400.0
0.0
No
Hz
C044 C052 C053
0.0 to 100.0
3.0 100
No
0.0 to 100.0 PID FB lower limit 0.0
No
App-14
Parameter No. C070
Function name Operator/ModBus selection Communication speed selection (Baud rate selection) Communication station No. selection Communication parity selection Communication stop bit selection
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 02: Digital Operator 03: ModBus 04: 4800 bps 05: 9600 bps 06: 19200 bps
Default setting 02
Unit
Set value
C071
04
No
Communication function adjustment
C072
1. to 32. 00: No parity 01: Even 02: Odd 1: 1-bit 2: 2-bit 00: Trip 01: Trip after deceleration stop 02: Ignore 03: Free run 04: Deceleration stop 0.00 to 99.99 0. to 1000. 0.0 to 200.0
1.
No
C074
00
No
C075
No
C076
02
No
C077 C078 Various adjustment C081
Communication error timeout Communication wait time FV adjustment
0.00 0. 100.0
No No Yes
s ms %
Appendix
C082
FI adjustment
0.0 to 200.0
100.0
Yes
App-15
Parameter No. C086 C091 C101
Function name AM offset adjustment Not used UP/DWN selection
Monitor or data range (Digital Operator) 0.0 to 10.0 Use "00". *Do not change. 00: Do not store the frequency data 01: Store the frequency data 00: Trip reset at power-on 01: Trip reset when the power is OFF 02: Enabled only during trip (Reset when the power is ON.) 00: RUN (signal during RUN) 01: FA1 (constant speed arrival signal) 02: FA2 (over set frequency arrival signal) 03: OL (overload warning) 04: OD (excessive PID deviation) 05: AL (alarm output) 06: Dc (disconnection detected) 07: FBV (PID FB status output) 08: NDc (network error) 10: ODc (Do not use.) 43: LOC (light load detection signal) 00: AND 01: OR 02: XOR 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0
Default setting 0.0 00 00
Changes during operation Yes No
Unit
Set value
C102
Reset selection
00
No
C141
00
No
Others
C142
01
No
C143
Logic operator selection Output terminal P1 ON delay Output terminal P1 OFF delay Relay output ON delay Relay output OFF delay Motor capacity selection *2nd motor capacity selection Motor pole number selection *2nd motor pole number selection Stabilization parameter
00
No
C144 C145 C148 C149
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Factory default
No No No No
Appendix
s s s
H003
Control parameter
H203
200-V class 0.2/0.4/0.75/1.5/2.2/3.7/5.5/7.5 400-V class 0.4/0.75/1.5/2.2/3.7/5.5/7.5
No Factory default 4 No 4 100 Yes Yes
kW
H004 H204 H006 H206
2 4 6 8
Pole
% %
0. to 255. *2nd stabilization parameter 100
App-16
Appendix-2 Product Life Curve
Appendix-2 Product Life Curve

Life of the Inverter smoothing capacitor Ambient temperature refers to the surrounding temperature of the Inverter. The following diagram shows the product life curve. The smoothing capacitor, which will waste due to the chemical reaction caused by parts temperatures, should normally be replaced once every 5 years. However, if the ambient temperature is high, or the Inverter is used with a current exceeding the rated current, for example, under overload conditions, its life will be significantly shortened.
Ambient temperature 50 (C) 40 30 20 10 0 -10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Capacitor life (year) 24-hour operation/day
12-hour operation/day
Note: Ambient temperature refers to the surrounding (atmospheric) temperature of the Inverter, or the temperature inside if the Inverter is encased or installed in an enclosure.
Appendix
App-17
INDEX
Index
Index
Numerics
2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration) .......... 4-24, 4-52 2nd control function and special 2nd function ......... 4-51 2-step acceleration/deceleration ..................... 4-24, 4-52 3-wire input .............................................................. 4-58
E
electronic thermal .................................................... 4-29 emergency shutoff input function ............................. 4-45 end frequency .......................................................... 4-10 EXT .......................................................................... 4-54 external trip .............................................................. 4-54
A F
acceleration time ....................................................... 4-5 acceleration time 2 .................................................. 4-24 acceleration/deceleration pattern ............................ 4-25 ADD ......................................................................... 4-61 AL ............................................................................ 4-66 alarm output ............................................................. 4-66 allowable momentary power interruption time ......... 4-27 AM ........................................................................... 4-75 analog input ...................................................... 4-9, 4-73 analog input disconnection detection ...................... 4-66 analog output ........................................................... 4-75 AT ............................................................................ 4-73 automatic carrier frequency reduction ..................... 4-42 automatic energy-saving operation ......................... 4-23 AVR ......................................................................... 4-23 AVR voltage selection ............................................. 4-23 F/R ........................................................................... 4-58 FA1 .......................................................................... 4-64 FA2 .......................................................................... 4-64 fault frequency monitor .............................................. 4-3 fault monitor ............................................................... 4-4 FBV .......................................................................... 4-67 fin temperature monitor ............................................. 4-3 forced operator ........................................................ 4-60 forced terminal block ............................................... 4-61 frequency addition (ADD) ........................................ 4-61 frequency arrival ...................................................... 4-63 frequency arrival signal ............................................ 4-63 frequency conversion coefficient ............................. 4-39 frequency conversion monitor ................................. 4-40 frequency jump ........................................................ 4-19 frequency limit lower limit ......................................................... 4-19 upper limit ........................................................ 4-19 frequency pull-in ...................................................... 4-28 frequency reference selection ................................... 4-7 FRS ......................................................................... 4-53 F-TM ........................................................................ 4-61 FV, FI sampling ....................................................... 4-11 FV/FI ........................................................................ 4-74
B
base frequency .......................................................... 4-8
C
carrier frequency ...................................................... 4-36 CF1 to CF4 .............................................................. 4-47 communication function (ModBus) .......................... 4-78 constant torque characteristics (VC) ....................... 4-13 control method ......................................................... 4-13 cooling fan control ................................................... 4-40
I
initialization .............................................................. 4-38 input terminal NC/NO .............................................. 4-43
D
DB ............................................................................ 4-49 Dc ............................................................................ 4-66 DC injection braking external DC injection braking ........................... 4-15 internal DC injection braking ............................ 4-17 set frequency operation ................................... 4-18 deceleration time ....................................................... 4-5 deceleration time 2 .................................................. 4-24 DWN ........................................................................ 4-59
J
JG ............................................................................ 4-48 jogging operation ............................................ 4-12, 4-48
L
light load detection ................................................... 4-70 LOC ......................................................................... 4-70 LOG ......................................................................... 4-69 logic operation output (LOG) ................................... 4-69
Index-1
Index
M
main unit monitor display selection .......................... 4-40 maximum frequency .................................................. 4-8 momentary power interruption non-stop function .... 4-33 momentary power interruption retry ......................... 4-27 momentary power interruption/undervoltage trip during stop selection ........................................................... 4-28 multi-function input .................................................. 4-43 multi-function input monitor ....................................... 4-2 multi-function output ................................................ 4-71 multi-function output monitor ..................................... 4-2 multi-function output selection ................................. 4-62 multi-step speed operation function ......................... 4-47 RUN ......................................................................... 4-63 RUN command selection ........................................... 4-7
S
SET .......................................................................... 4-51 SFT .......................................................................... 4-55 signal during RUN ................................................... 4-63 sink/source logic ...................................................... 2-11 soft lock .......................................................... 4-33, 4-55 SP-SET .................................................................... 4-51 STA .......................................................................... 4-58 stabilization parameter ............................................ 4-76 start frequency ......................................................... 4-10 starting frequency .................................................... 4-36 STOP key selection ................................................. 4-39 stop selection ........................................................... 4-39 STP .......................................................................... 4-58
N
NDc .......................................................................... 4-68
O
OD ........................................................................... 4-65 OL ............................................................................ 4-65 OPE ......................................................................... 4-60 output current monitor ............................................... 4-1 output frequency monitor ........................................... 4-1 output frequency setting ............................................ 4-5 output terminal NC/NO selection ............................. 4-71 output voltage gain .................................................. 4-14 output voltage monitor ............................................... 4-3 overcurrent suppression .......................................... 4-42 overload limit/overload warning ............................... 4-31 overload warning ............................................ 4-32, 4-65 overvoltage LAD stop function ................................. 4-41
T
thermistor trip function ............................................. 4-57 torque boost ............................................................. 4-12 total RUN time ........................................................... 4-3
U
UDC ......................................................................... 4-59 UP ............................................................................ 4-59 UP/DOWN ............................................................... 4-59 USP ......................................................................... 4-55
P
PID .................................................................. 4-20, 4-59 PID feedback value monitor ...................................... 4-1 PIDC ........................................................................ 4-59 power ON time ........................................................... 4-3 power recovery restart prevention ........................... 4-55 PTC ......................................................................... 4-57
R
RDY ................................................................ 4-42, 4-62 RDY (ready) function ............................................... 4-42 reduced torque characteristics (VP) ........................ 4-13 relay output contact selection .................................. 4-72 reset ......................................................................... 4-56 retry selection .......................................................... 4-27 rotation (digital operator) direction selection .............. 4-6 rotation (RUN) direction monitor ................................ 4-1 RS ............................................................................ 4-56
Index-2
Terms and Conditions of Sale

1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed part of all quotes, agreements, purchase orders, acknowledgments, price lists, catalogs, manuals, brochures and other documents, whether electronic or in writing, relating to the sale of products or services (collectively, the "Products") by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies (Omron). Omron objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyers purchase order or other documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms. 2. Prices; Payment Terms. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by Omron. Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease prices on any unshipped portions of outstanding orders. Payments for Products are due net 30 days unless otherwise stated in the invoice. 3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and duties, and will be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Omrons payment terms and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts. 4. Interest. Omron, at its option, may charge Buyer 1-1/2% interest per month or the maximum legal rate, whichever is less, on any balance not paid within the stated terms. 5. Orders. Omron will accept no order less than $200 net billing. 6. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the importation or sale of the Products. 7. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon, imposed directly or indirectly on Omron or required to be collected directly or indirectly by Omron for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation, consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder (including customs duties and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Omron. 8. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory to Omron, Omron reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Omron may (without liability and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Products sold hereunder and stop any Products in transit until Buyer pays all amounts, including amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due, which are owing to it by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts. 9. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses. 10. Force Majeure. Omron shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods, strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the requirements of any government authority. 11. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Omron: a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Omron; Omron will not drop ship except in break down situations. b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer; c. All sales and shipments of Products shall be FOB shipping point (unless otherwise stated in writing by Omron), at which point title and risk of loss shall pass from Omron to Buyer; provided that Omron shall retain a security interest in the Products until the full purchase price is paid; d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only; and e. Omron will package Products as it deems proper for protection against normal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions. 12. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Omron for shortage or damage to the Products occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transportation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Products from Omron in the condition claimed. 13. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Omrons exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied. (b) Limitations. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Omrons sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omrons election, to (i) replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non-complying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omrons analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty. See http://www.omron247.com or contact your Omron representative for published information. Limitation on Liability; Etc. OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY. Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted. Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron Companies and their employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, investigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Omron is a party) which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way with respect to the Products. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or settle any action brought against such Companies to the extent based on a claim that any Product made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of another party. Property; Confidentiality. Any intellectual property in the Products is the exclusive property of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Omron. Notwithstanding any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of Omron. All information and materials supplied by Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary, and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly prevent disclosure to any third party. Export Controls. Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws, regulations and licenses regarding (i) export of products or information; (iii) sale of products to forbidden or other proscribed persons; and (ii) disclosure to non-citizens of regulated technology or information. Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Omron in exercising any right and no course of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate as a waiver of rights by Omron. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without Omron's written consent. (c) Law. These Terms are governed by the law of the jurisdiction of the home office of the Omron company from which Buyer is purchasing the Products (without regard to conflict of law principles). (d) Amendment. These Terms constitute the entire agreement between Buyer and Omron relating to the Products, and no provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. (e) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such provision shall not invalidate any other provision. (f) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice. (g) Definitions. As used herein, including means including without limitation; and Omron Companies (or similar words) mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect subsidiary or affiliate thereof.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use

1. Suitability of Use. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyers application or use of the Product. At Buyers request, Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product with respect to Buyers application, product or system. Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases but the following is a non-exhaustive list of applications for which particular attention must be given: (i) Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this document. (ii) Use in consumer products or any use in significant quantities. (iii) Energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations. (iv) Systems, machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Product. NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO 2. 3. ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRONS PRODUCT IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM. Programmable Products. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the users programming of a programmable Product, or any consequence thereof. Performance Data. Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omrons test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the Omrons Warranty and Limitations of Liability. Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application. Please consult with your Omrons representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product. Errors and Omissions. Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.
4.
5.
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC THE AMERICAS HEADQUARTERS Schaumburg, IL USA 847.843.7900 800.556.6766 www.omron247.com OMRON CANADA, INC. HEAD OFFICE Toronto, ON, Canada 416.286.6465 866.986.6766 www.omron.ca OMRON ELETRNICA DO BRASIL LTDA HEAD OFFICE So Paulo, SP, Brasil 55.11.2101.6300 www.omron.com.br OMRON ELECTRONICS MEXICO SA DE CV HEAD OFFICE Apodaca, N.L. 52.811.156.99.10 mela@omron.com OMRON ARGENTINA SALES OFFICE Cono Sur 54.11.4787.1129 OMRON CHILE SALES OFFICE Santiago 56.2206.4592 OTHER OMRON LATIN AMERICA SALES 56.2206.4592
2008 Omron Electronics LLC Printed in U.S.A.
I558-E1-02
Note: Specifications are subject to change.

User'S Manual: Compact Simplified Inverters

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User'S Manual: Compact Simplified Inverters

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User'S Manual: Compact Simplified Inverters

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cat. No.

Compact Simplified Inverters

Read and Understand This Manual

Read and Understand This Manual

Warranty and Limitations of Liability

Read and Understand This Manual

Read and Understand This Manual

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

Meanings of Signal Words

Precautions for Safe Use

Precautions for Safe Use

Transporting, Installation, and Wiring

Operation and Adjustment

Maintenance and Inspection

Precautions for Correct Use

Precautions for Correct Use

Main Circuit Power Supply

Error Retry Function

Non-Stop Function at Momentary Power Interruption

Operation Stop Command

Precautions for Correct Use

Checking Before Unpacking

Checking Before Unpacking

zChecking the Nameplate

Inverter model Input specifications Output specifications

zChecking the Model

Enclosure rating A Panel-mounting (IP10 min.) or closed wall-mounting models

Checking the Accessories

Cat. No. I558-E1-02

Revision date December 2007 First printing

Changes and revision pages

About This Manual

About This Manual

Chapter 7 Specifications Appendix

Inspection and Maintenance

International Standards Models (EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards)

Classification EMC Directive EC Directives Low-voltage Directive UL/cUL Standards

Applicable standard EN61800-3: 2004 EN61800-5-1: 2003 UL508C

Compact Simplified Inverter for Customer's Environment and Application Demands

Wide Ranging Capacity and Power Supply

Emergency Shutoff Function

Compliance With All Standards

The RoHS Directive

Noise and Harmonics Suppression Option

Handles a Variety of I/O Signals

1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts

1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts

FREQ (FREQUENCY) adjuster Bottom cover

Connection to RJ45 Jack

1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts

Names of Parts Inside the Front Cover

Relay output terminal block

Control circuit terminal block

Main circuit terminal block (output side)

1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts

2-1 Installation Transporting, Installation, and Wiring

Precautions for Use

Positions for installing screws